1 1.1 skrll /* IBM S/390-specific support for 64-bit ELF 2 1.1.1.12 christos Copyright (C) 2000-2026 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 3 1.1 skrll Contributed Martin Schwidefsky (schwidefsky (at) de.ibm.com). 4 1.1 skrll 5 1.1 skrll This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library. 6 1.1 skrll 7 1.1 skrll This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify 8 1.1 skrll it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by 9 1.1 skrll the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or 10 1.1 skrll (at your option) any later version. 11 1.1 skrll 12 1.1 skrll This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, 13 1.1 skrll but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of 14 1.1 skrll MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the 15 1.1 skrll GNU General Public License for more details. 16 1.1 skrll 17 1.1 skrll You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 18 1.1 skrll along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software 19 1.1 skrll Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 20 1.1 skrll 02110-1301, USA. */ 21 1.1 skrll 22 1.1 skrll #include "sysdep.h" 23 1.1 skrll #include "bfd.h" 24 1.1 skrll #include "bfdlink.h" 25 1.1 skrll #include "libbfd.h" 26 1.1 skrll #include "elf-bfd.h" 27 1.1 skrll #include "elf/s390.h" 28 1.1.1.6 christos #include "elf-s390.h" 29 1.1.1.11 christos #include "dwarf2.h" 30 1.1.1.11 christos #include "sframe.h" 31 1.1.1.11 christos #include "sframe-api.h" 32 1.1.1.6 christos #include <stdarg.h> 33 1.1 skrll 34 1.1 skrll /* In case we're on a 32-bit machine, construct a 64-bit "-1" value 35 1.1 skrll from smaller values. Start with zero, widen, *then* decrement. */ 36 1.1 skrll #define MINUS_ONE (((bfd_vma)0) - 1) 37 1.1 skrll 38 1.1.1.3 christos static bfd_reloc_status_type 39 1.1.1.3 christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *, 40 1.1.1.3 christos asection *, bfd *, char **); 41 1.1.1.3 christos static bfd_reloc_status_type 42 1.1.1.3 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *, 43 1.1.1.3 christos asection *, bfd *, char **); 44 1.1.1.3 christos 45 1.1 skrll /* The relocation "howto" table. */ 46 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type elf_howto_table[] = 47 1.1 skrll { 48 1.1 skrll HOWTO (R_390_NONE, /* type */ 49 1.1 skrll 0, /* rightshift */ 50 1.1.1.9 christos 0, /* size */ 51 1.1 skrll 0, /* bitsize */ 52 1.1.1.9 christos false, /* pc_relative */ 53 1.1 skrll 0, /* bitpos */ 54 1.1 skrll complain_overflow_dont, /* complain_on_overflow */ 55 1.1 skrll bfd_elf_generic_reloc, /* special_function */ 56 1.1 skrll "R_390_NONE", /* name */ 57 1.1.1.9 christos false, /* partial_inplace */ 58 1.1 skrll 0, /* src_mask */ 59 1.1 skrll 0, /* dst_mask */ 60 1.1.1.9 christos false), /* pcrel_offset */ 61 1.1 skrll 62 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_8, 0, 1, 8, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 63 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_8", false, 0,0x000000ff, false), 64 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont, 65 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_12", false, 0,0x00000fff, false), 66 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 67 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false), 68 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 69 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false), 70 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC32, 0, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 71 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32", false, 0,0xffffffff, true), 72 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 73 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT12", false, 0,0x00000fff, false), 74 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 75 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false), 76 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT32, 0, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 77 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32", false, 0,0xffffffff, true), 78 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_COPY, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 79 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_COPY", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 80 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GLOB_DAT, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 81 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GLOB_DAT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 82 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_JMP_SLOT, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 83 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_JMP_SLOT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 84 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_RELATIVE, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 85 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_RELATIVE", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 86 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 87 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF32", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 88 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPC, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 89 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPC", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true), 90 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 91 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false), 92 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC16, 0, 2, 16, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 93 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, true), 94 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC16DBL, 1, 2, 16, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 95 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16DBL", false, 0,0x0000ffff, true), 96 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT16DBL, 1, 2, 16, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 97 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT16DBL", false, 0,0x0000ffff, true), 98 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC32DBL, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 99 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32DBL", false, 0,0xffffffff, true), 100 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT32DBL, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 101 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32DBL", false, 0,0xffffffff, true), 102 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPCDBL, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 103 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPCDBL", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true), 104 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 105 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 106 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC64, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 107 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true), 108 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 109 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 110 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT64, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 111 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true), 112 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTENT, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 113 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTENT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true), 114 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 115 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false), 116 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 117 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 118 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont, 119 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT12", false, 0,0x00000fff, false), 120 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 121 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false), 122 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 123 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false), 124 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 125 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 126 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLTENT, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 127 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLTENT",false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true), 128 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 129 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false), 130 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 131 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false), 132 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 133 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false), 134 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LOAD, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont, 135 1.1.1.9 christos s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LOAD", false, 0, 0, false), 136 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GDCALL, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont, 137 1.1.1.9 christos s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GDCALL", false, 0, 0, false), 138 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDCALL, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont, 139 1.1.1.9 christos s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDCALL", false, 0, 0, false), 140 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GD32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GD32. */ 141 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GD64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 142 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GD64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 143 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont, 144 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE12", false, 0, 0x00000fff, false), 145 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GOTIE32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GOTIE32. */ 146 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 147 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 148 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDM32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDM32. */ 149 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDM64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 150 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDM64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 151 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_IE32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_IE32. */ 152 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IE64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 153 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 154 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IEENT, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 155 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IEENT", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, true), 156 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LE32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LE32. */ 157 1.1.1.12 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LE64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 158 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 159 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDO32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDO32. */ 160 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDO64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 161 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDO64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 162 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPMOD, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 163 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPMOD", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 164 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPOFF, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 165 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPOFF", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 166 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_TPOFF, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 167 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_TPOFF", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 168 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont, 169 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false), 170 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont, 171 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOT20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false), 172 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont, 173 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false), 174 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont, 175 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false), 176 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_IRELATIVE, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 177 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_IRELATIVE", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false), 178 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC12DBL, 1, 2, 12, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 179 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC12DBL", false, 0,0x00000fff, true), 180 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT12DBL, 1, 2, 12, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 181 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT12DBL", false, 0,0x00000fff, true), 182 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC24DBL, 1, 4, 24, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 183 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC24DBL", false, 0,0x00ffffff, true), 184 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT24DBL, 1, 4, 24, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield, 185 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT24DBL", false, 0,0x00ffffff, true), 186 1.1 skrll }; 187 1.1 skrll 188 1.1 skrll /* GNU extension to record C++ vtable hierarchy. */ 189 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto = 190 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT, 0,8,0,false,0,complain_overflow_dont, NULL, "R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT", false,0, 0, false); 191 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtentry_howto = 192 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTENTRY, 0,8,0,false,0,complain_overflow_dont, _bfd_elf_rel_vtable_reloc_fn,"R_390_GNU_VTENTRY", false,0,0, false); 193 1.1 skrll 194 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type * 195 1.1.1.7 christos elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup (bfd *abfd, 196 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_reloc_code_real_type code) 197 1.1 skrll { 198 1.1 skrll switch (code) 199 1.1 skrll { 200 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_NONE: 201 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_NONE]; 202 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_8: 203 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_8]; 204 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_12: 205 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_12]; 206 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_16: 207 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_16]; 208 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32: 209 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32]; 210 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_CTOR: 211 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32]; 212 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32_PCREL: 213 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32]; 214 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT12: 215 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT12]; 216 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32_GOT_PCREL: 217 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT32]; 218 1.1.1.12 christos case BFD_RELOC_32_PLT_PCREL: 219 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32]; 220 1.1.1.12 christos case BFD_RELOC_COPY: 221 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_COPY]; 222 1.1.1.12 christos case BFD_RELOC_GLOB_DAT: 223 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GLOB_DAT]; 224 1.1.1.12 christos case BFD_RELOC_JMP_SLOT: 225 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_JMP_SLOT]; 226 1.1.1.12 christos case BFD_RELOC_RELATIVE: 227 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_RELATIVE]; 228 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32_GOTOFF: 229 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF32]; 230 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPC: 231 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPC]; 232 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT16: 233 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT16]; 234 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_16_PCREL: 235 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16]; 236 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PC12DBL: 237 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC12DBL]; 238 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT12DBL: 239 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT12DBL]; 240 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PC16DBL: 241 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16DBL]; 242 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT16DBL: 243 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT16DBL]; 244 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PC24DBL: 245 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC24DBL]; 246 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT24DBL: 247 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT24DBL]; 248 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PC32DBL: 249 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32DBL]; 250 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32DBL: 251 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32DBL]; 252 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPCDBL: 253 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPCDBL]; 254 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_64: 255 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_64]; 256 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_64_PCREL: 257 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC64]; 258 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT64: 259 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT64]; 260 1.1.1.12 christos case BFD_RELOC_64_PLT_PCREL: 261 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT64]; 262 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTENT: 263 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTENT]; 264 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_16_GOTOFF: 265 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF16]; 266 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTOFF64: 267 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF64]; 268 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT12: 269 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT12]; 270 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT16: 271 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT16]; 272 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT32: 273 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT32]; 274 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT64: 275 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT64]; 276 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLTENT: 277 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLTENT]; 278 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF16: 279 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF16]; 280 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF32: 281 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF32]; 282 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF64: 283 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF64]; 284 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LOAD: 285 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LOAD]; 286 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GDCALL: 287 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GDCALL]; 288 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDCALL: 289 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDCALL]; 290 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GD64: 291 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GD64]; 292 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE12: 293 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE12]; 294 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE64: 295 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE64]; 296 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDM64: 297 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDM64]; 298 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IE64: 299 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IE64]; 300 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IEENT: 301 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IEENT]; 302 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LE64: 303 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LE64]; 304 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDO64: 305 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDO64]; 306 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPMOD: 307 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPMOD]; 308 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPOFF: 309 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPOFF]; 310 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_TPOFF: 311 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_TPOFF]; 312 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_20: 313 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_20]; 314 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT20: 315 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT20]; 316 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT20: 317 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT20]; 318 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE20: 319 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE20]; 320 1.1.1.12 christos case BFD_RELOC_IRELATIVE: 321 1.1.1.3 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_IRELATIVE]; 322 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_INHERIT: 323 1.1 skrll return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto; 324 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_ENTRY: 325 1.1 skrll return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto; 326 1.1 skrll default: 327 1.1 skrll break; 328 1.1 skrll } 329 1.1.1.7 christos 330 1.1.1.7 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 331 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"), abfd, (int) code); 332 1.1.1.7 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value); 333 1.1.1.7 christos return NULL; 334 1.1 skrll } 335 1.1 skrll 336 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type * 337 1.1 skrll elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 338 1.1 skrll const char *r_name) 339 1.1 skrll { 340 1.1 skrll unsigned int i; 341 1.1 skrll 342 1.1 skrll for (i = 0; 343 1.1 skrll i < sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]); 344 1.1 skrll i++) 345 1.1 skrll if (elf_howto_table[i].name != NULL 346 1.1 skrll && strcasecmp (elf_howto_table[i].name, r_name) == 0) 347 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[i]; 348 1.1 skrll 349 1.1.1.5 christos if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto.name, r_name) == 0) 350 1.1.1.5 christos return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto; 351 1.1.1.5 christos if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtentry_howto.name, r_name) == 0) 352 1.1.1.5 christos return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto; 353 1.1 skrll 354 1.1 skrll return NULL; 355 1.1 skrll } 356 1.1 skrll 357 1.1 skrll /* We need to use ELF64_R_TYPE so we have our own copy of this function, 358 1.1 skrll and elf64-s390.c has its own copy. */ 359 1.1 skrll 360 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 361 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_info_to_howto (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 362 1.1.1.3 christos arelent *cache_ptr, 363 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela *dst) 364 1.1 skrll { 365 1.1 skrll unsigned int r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE(dst->r_info); 366 1.1.1.7 christos 367 1.1 skrll switch (r_type) 368 1.1 skrll { 369 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT: 370 1.1 skrll cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto; 371 1.1 skrll break; 372 1.1 skrll 373 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY: 374 1.1 skrll cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto; 375 1.1 skrll break; 376 1.1 skrll 377 1.1 skrll default: 378 1.1 skrll if (r_type >= sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0])) 379 1.1 skrll { 380 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 381 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"), 382 1.1.1.7 christos abfd, r_type); 383 1.1.1.7 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value); 384 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 385 1.1 skrll } 386 1.1 skrll cache_ptr->howto = &elf_howto_table[r_type]; 387 1.1 skrll } 388 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 389 1.1 skrll } 390 1.1 skrll 391 1.1 skrll /* A relocation function which doesn't do anything. */ 392 1.1 skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type 393 1.1.1.3 christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 394 1.1.1.3 christos arelent *reloc_entry, 395 1.1.1.3 christos asymbol *symbol ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 396 1.1.1.3 christos void * data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 397 1.1.1.3 christos asection *input_section, 398 1.1.1.3 christos bfd *output_bfd, 399 1.1.1.3 christos char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 400 1.1 skrll { 401 1.1 skrll if (output_bfd) 402 1.1 skrll reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset; 403 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_ok; 404 1.1 skrll } 405 1.1 skrll 406 1.1 skrll /* Handle the large displacement relocs. */ 407 1.1 skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type 408 1.1.1.3 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *abfd, 409 1.1.1.3 christos arelent *reloc_entry, 410 1.1.1.3 christos asymbol *symbol, 411 1.1.1.3 christos void * data, 412 1.1.1.3 christos asection *input_section, 413 1.1.1.3 christos bfd *output_bfd, 414 1.1.1.3 christos char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 415 1.1 skrll { 416 1.1 skrll reloc_howto_type *howto = reloc_entry->howto; 417 1.1 skrll bfd_vma relocation; 418 1.1 skrll bfd_vma insn; 419 1.1 skrll 420 1.1 skrll if (output_bfd != (bfd *) NULL 421 1.1 skrll && (symbol->flags & BSF_SECTION_SYM) == 0 422 1.1 skrll && (! howto->partial_inplace 423 1.1 skrll || reloc_entry->addend == 0)) 424 1.1 skrll { 425 1.1 skrll reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset; 426 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_ok; 427 1.1 skrll } 428 1.1 skrll if (output_bfd != NULL) 429 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_continue; 430 1.1 skrll 431 1.1 skrll if (reloc_entry->address > bfd_get_section_limit (abfd, input_section)) 432 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_outofrange; 433 1.1 skrll 434 1.1 skrll relocation = (symbol->value 435 1.1 skrll + symbol->section->output_section->vma 436 1.1 skrll + symbol->section->output_offset); 437 1.1 skrll relocation += reloc_entry->addend; 438 1.1 skrll if (howto->pc_relative) 439 1.1 skrll { 440 1.1 skrll relocation -= (input_section->output_section->vma 441 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset); 442 1.1 skrll relocation -= reloc_entry->address; 443 1.1 skrll } 444 1.1 skrll 445 1.1.1.4 christos insn = bfd_get_32 (abfd, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address); 446 1.1 skrll insn |= (relocation & 0xfff) << 16 | (relocation & 0xff000) >> 4; 447 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (abfd, insn, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address); 448 1.1 skrll 449 1.1 skrll if ((bfd_signed_vma) relocation < - 0x80000 450 1.1 skrll || (bfd_signed_vma) relocation > 0x7ffff) 451 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_overflow; 452 1.1 skrll else 453 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_ok; 454 1.1 skrll } 455 1.1 skrll 456 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 457 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_is_local_label_name (bfd *abfd, const char *name) 458 1.1 skrll { 459 1.1 skrll if (name[0] == '.' && (name[1] == 'X' || name[1] == 'L')) 460 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 461 1.1 skrll 462 1.1 skrll return _bfd_elf_is_local_label_name (abfd, name); 463 1.1 skrll } 464 1.1 skrll 465 1.1 skrll /* Functions for the 390 ELF linker. */ 466 1.1 skrll 467 1.1 skrll /* The name of the dynamic interpreter. This is put in the .interp 468 1.1 skrll section. */ 469 1.1 skrll 470 1.1.1.3 christos #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld64.so.1" 471 1.1 skrll 472 1.1 skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid 473 1.1 skrll copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss 474 1.1 skrll section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the 475 1.1 skrll shared lib. */ 476 1.1 skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1 477 1.1 skrll 478 1.1 skrll /* The size in bytes of the first entry in the procedure linkage table. */ 479 1.1 skrll #define PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE 32 480 1.1 skrll /* The size in bytes of an entry in the procedure linkage table. */ 481 1.1 skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 32 482 1.1 skrll 483 1.1 skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 8 484 1.1 skrll 485 1.1.1.3 christos #define RELA_ENTRY_SIZE sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela) 486 1.1.1.3 christos 487 1.1.1.8 christos /* The first three entries in a global offset table are reserved, 488 1.1 skrll and the initial contents are unimportant (we zero them out). 489 1.1 skrll Subsequent entries look like this. See the SVR4 ABI 386 490 1.1 skrll supplement to see how this works. */ 491 1.1 skrll 492 1.1 skrll /* For the s390, simple addr offset can only be 0 - 4096. 493 1.1 skrll To use the full 16777216 TB address space, several instructions 494 1.1 skrll are needed to load an address in a register and execute 495 1.1 skrll a branch( or just saving the address) 496 1.1 skrll 497 1.1 skrll Furthermore, only r 0 and 1 are free to use!!! */ 498 1.1 skrll 499 1.1 skrll /* The first 3 words in the GOT are then reserved. 500 1.1 skrll Word 0 is the address of the dynamic table. 501 1.1 skrll Word 1 is a pointer to a structure describing the object 502 1.1 skrll Word 2 is used to point to the loader entry address. 503 1.1 skrll 504 1.1 skrll The code for PLT entries looks like this: 505 1.1 skrll 506 1.1 skrll The GOT holds the address in the PLT to be executed. 507 1.1 skrll The loader then gets: 508 1.1.1.5 christos 48(15) = Pointer to the structure describing the object. 509 1.1.1.5 christos 56(15) = Offset in symbol table 510 1.1 skrll The loader must then find the module where the function is 511 1.1 skrll and insert the address in the GOT. 512 1.1 skrll 513 1.1 skrll PLT1: LARL 1,<fn>@GOTENT # 6 bytes Load address of GOT entry in r1 514 1.1.1.6 christos LG 1,0(1) # 6 bytes Load address from GOT in r1 515 1.1.1.6 christos BCR 15,1 # 2 bytes Jump to address 516 1.1.1.6 christos RET1: BASR 1,0 # 2 bytes Return from GOT 1st time 517 1.1.1.8 christos LGF 1,12(1) # 6 bytes Load rela.plt offset into r1 518 1.1.1.8 christos BRCL 15,-x # 6 bytes Jump to first PLT entry 519 1.1.1.6 christos .long ? # 4 bytes offset into .rela.plt 520 1.1 skrll 521 1.1 skrll Total = 32 bytes per PLT entry 522 1.1 skrll Fixup at offset 2: relative address to GOT entry 523 1.1 skrll Fixup at offset 22: relative branch to PLT0 524 1.1.1.3 christos Fixup at offset 28: 32 bit offset into .rela.plt 525 1.1 skrll 526 1.1.1.3 christos A 32 bit offset into the symbol table is enough. It allows for 527 1.1.1.3 christos .rela.plt sections up to a size of 2 gigabyte. A single dynamic 528 1.1.1.3 christos object (the main program, any shared library) is limited to 4GB in 529 1.1.1.3 christos size. Having a .rela.plt of 2GB would already make the .plt 530 1.1.1.3 christos section bigger than 8GB. */ 531 1.1.1.3 christos 532 1.1.1.3 christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_plt_entry[PLT_ENTRY_SIZE] = 533 1.1.1.3 christos { 534 1.1.1.6 christos 0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, /* larl %r1,. */ 535 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x04, /* lg %r1,0(%r1) */ 536 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0xf1, /* br %r1 */ 537 1.1.1.6 christos 0x0d, 0x10, /* basr %r1,%r0 */ 538 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x0c, 0x00, 0x14, /* lgf %r1,12(%r1) */ 539 1.1.1.6 christos 0xc0, 0xf4, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, /* jg first plt */ 540 1.1.1.6 christos 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00 /* .long 0x00000000 */ 541 1.1.1.3 christos }; 542 1.1 skrll 543 1.1 skrll /* The first PLT entry pushes the offset into the symbol table 544 1.1.1.3 christos from R1 onto the stack at 56(15) and the loader object info 545 1.1.1.3 christos at 48(15), loads the loader address in R1 and jumps to it. */ 546 1.1 skrll 547 1.1 skrll /* The first entry in the PLT: 548 1.1 skrll 549 1.1 skrll PLT0: 550 1.1 skrll STG 1,56(15) # r1 contains the offset into the symbol table 551 1.1 skrll LARL 1,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE # load address of global offset table 552 1.1 skrll MVC 48(8,15),8(1) # move loader ino (object struct address) to stack 553 1.1 skrll LG 1,16(1) # get entry address of loader 554 1.1 skrll BCR 15,1 # jump to loader 555 1.1 skrll 556 1.1 skrll Fixup at offset 8: relative address to start of GOT. */ 557 1.1 skrll 558 1.1.1.3 christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_first_plt_entry[PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE] = 559 1.1.1.3 christos { 560 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0xf0, 0x38, 0x00, 0x24, /* stg %r1,56(%r15) */ 561 1.1.1.6 christos 0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, /* larl %r1,. */ 562 1.1.1.6 christos 0xd2, 0x07, 0xf0, 0x30, 0x10, 0x08, /* mvc 48(8,%r15),8(%r1) */ 563 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x04, /* lg %r1,16(%r1) */ 564 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0xf1, /* br %r1 */ 565 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0x00, /* nopr %r0 */ 566 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0x00, /* nopr %r0 */ 567 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0x00 /* nopr %r0 */ 568 1.1.1.3 christos }; 569 1.1 skrll 570 1.1.1.11 christos /* .eh_frame covering the .plt section. */ 571 1.1.1.11 christos 572 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_CIE_SIZE 24 573 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_FDE_SIZE 20 574 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_FDE_START_OFFSET (PLT_CIE_SIZE + 8) 575 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_FDE_LEN_OFFSET (PLT_CIE_SIZE + 12) 576 1.1.1.11 christos 577 1.1.1.11 christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt[] = 578 1.1.1.11 christos { 579 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, PLT_CIE_SIZE - 4, /* CIE length */ 580 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, 0, /* CIE ID */ 581 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* CIE version */ 582 1.1.1.11 christos 'z', 'R', 0, /* Augmentation string */ 583 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Code alignment factor */ 584 1.1.1.11 christos 0x78, /* Data alignment factor */ 585 1.1.1.11 christos 14, /* Return address column */ 586 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Augmentation size */ 587 1.1.1.11 christos DW_EH_PE_pcrel | DW_EH_PE_sdata4, /* FDE encoding */ 588 1.1.1.11 christos DW_CFA_def_cfa, 15, 0xa0, 0x01, /* DW_CFA_def_cfa: r15 ofs 160 */ 589 1.1.1.11 christos DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop, 590 1.1.1.11 christos 591 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, PLT_FDE_SIZE - 4, /* FDE length */ 592 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, PLT_CIE_SIZE + 4, /* CIE pointer */ 593 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, 0, /* R_S390_PC32 .plt goes here */ 594 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, 0, /* .plt size goes here */ 595 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* Augmentation size */ 596 1.1.1.11 christos DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop 597 1.1.1.11 christos }; 598 1.1.1.11 christos 599 1.1.1.11 christos /* .sframe covering the .plt section. */ 600 1.1.1.11 christos 601 1.1.1.11 christos /* This must be the same as sframe_get_hdr_size (sfh). For s390x, this value 602 1.1.1.11 christos is the same as sizeof (sframe_header) because there is no SFrame auxilliary 603 1.1.1.11 christos header. */ 604 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_SFRAME_FDE_START_OFFSET sizeof (sframe_header) 605 1.1.1.11 christos 606 1.1.1.11 christos #define SFRAME_PLT0_MAX_NUM_FRES 1 607 1.1.1.11 christos #define SFRAME_PLTN_MAX_NUM_FRES 1 608 1.1.1.11 christos 609 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390x_sframe_plt 610 1.1.1.11 christos { 611 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int plt0_entry_size; 612 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int plt0_num_fres; 613 1.1.1.11 christos const sframe_frame_row_entry *plt0_fres[SFRAME_PLT0_MAX_NUM_FRES]; 614 1.1.1.11 christos 615 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int pltn_entry_size; 616 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int pltn_num_fres; 617 1.1.1.11 christos const sframe_frame_row_entry *pltn_fres[SFRAME_PLTN_MAX_NUM_FRES]; 618 1.1.1.11 christos }; 619 1.1.1.11 christos 620 1.1.1.11 christos /* .sframe FRE covering the PLT0/PLTn .plt section entry. */ 621 1.1.1.11 christos static const sframe_frame_row_entry elf_s390x_sframe_plt_fre = 622 1.1.1.11 christos { 623 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* SFrame FRE start address. */ 624 1.1.1.11 christos { SFRAME_V2_S390X_CFA_OFFSET_ENCODE (160), 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }, /* Offset bytes. */ 625 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_V1_FRE_INFO (SFRAME_BASE_REG_SP, 1, SFRAME_FRE_OFFSET_1B) /* FRE info. */ 626 1.1.1.11 christos }; 627 1.1.1.11 christos 628 1.1.1.11 christos /* SFrame helper object for PLT. */ 629 1.1.1.11 christos static const struct elf_s390x_sframe_plt elf_s390x_sframe_plt = 630 1.1.1.11 christos { 631 1.1.1.11 christos PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE, 632 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Number of FREs for PLT0. */ 633 1.1.1.11 christos /* Array of SFrame FREs for PLT0. */ 634 1.1.1.11 christos { &elf_s390x_sframe_plt_fre }, 635 1.1.1.11 christos 636 1.1.1.11 christos PLT_ENTRY_SIZE, 637 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Number of FREs for PLTn. */ 638 1.1.1.11 christos /* Array of SFrame FREs for PLTn. */ 639 1.1.1.11 christos { &elf_s390x_sframe_plt_fre }, 640 1.1.1.11 christos }; 641 1.1.1.11 christos 642 1.1 skrll 643 1.1 skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash entry. */ 644 1.1 skrll 645 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry 646 1.1 skrll { 647 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry elf; 648 1.1 skrll 649 1.1 skrll /* Number of GOTPLT references for a function. */ 650 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma gotplt_refcount; 651 1.1 skrll 652 1.1 skrll #define GOT_UNKNOWN 0 653 1.1 skrll #define GOT_NORMAL 1 654 1.1 skrll #define GOT_TLS_GD 2 655 1.1 skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE 3 656 1.1.1.12 christos #define GOT_TLS_IE_NLT 4 /* Initial Exec, no literal pool entry. */ 657 1.1 skrll unsigned char tls_type; 658 1.1.1.3 christos 659 1.1.1.3 christos /* For pointer equality reasons we might need to change the symbol 660 1.1.1.3 christos type from STT_GNU_IFUNC to STT_FUNC together with its value and 661 1.1.1.3 christos section entry. So after alloc_dynrelocs only these values should 662 1.1.1.3 christos be used. In order to check whether a symbol is IFUNC use 663 1.1.1.3 christos s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p. */ 664 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma ifunc_resolver_address; 665 1.1.1.3 christos asection *ifunc_resolver_section; 666 1.1 skrll }; 667 1.1 skrll 668 1.1 skrll #define elf_s390_hash_entry(ent) \ 669 1.1 skrll ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *)(ent)) 670 1.1 skrll 671 1.1.1.3 christos /* This structure represents an entry in the local PLT list needed for 672 1.1.1.3 christos local IFUNC symbols. */ 673 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry 674 1.1.1.3 christos { 675 1.1.1.3 christos /* The section of the local symbol. 676 1.1.1.3 christos Set in relocate_section and used in finish_dynamic_sections. */ 677 1.1.1.3 christos asection *sec; 678 1.1.1.3 christos 679 1.1.1.3 christos union 680 1.1.1.3 christos { 681 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_signed_vma refcount; 682 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma offset; 683 1.1.1.3 christos } plt; 684 1.1.1.3 christos }; 685 1.1.1.3 christos 686 1.1 skrll /* NOTE: Keep this structure in sync with 687 1.1 skrll the one declared in elf32-s390.c. */ 688 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_obj_tdata 689 1.1 skrll { 690 1.1 skrll struct elf_obj_tdata root; 691 1.1 skrll 692 1.1.1.3 christos /* A local PLT is needed for ifunc symbols. */ 693 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt; 694 1.1.1.3 christos 695 1.1 skrll /* TLS type for each local got entry. */ 696 1.1 skrll char *local_got_tls_type; 697 1.1 skrll }; 698 1.1 skrll 699 1.1 skrll #define elf_s390_tdata(abfd) \ 700 1.1 skrll ((struct elf_s390_obj_tdata *) (abfd)->tdata.any) 701 1.1 skrll 702 1.1.1.3 christos #define elf_s390_local_plt(abfd) \ 703 1.1.1.3 christos (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_plt) 704 1.1.1.3 christos 705 1.1 skrll #define elf_s390_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \ 706 1.1 skrll (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_got_tls_type) 707 1.1 skrll 708 1.1 skrll #define is_s390_elf(bfd) \ 709 1.1 skrll (bfd_get_flavour (bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour \ 710 1.1 skrll && elf_tdata (bfd) != NULL \ 711 1.1.1.2 christos && elf_object_id (bfd) == S390_ELF_DATA) 712 1.1 skrll 713 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 714 1.1 skrll elf_s390_mkobject (bfd *abfd) 715 1.1 skrll { 716 1.1.1.11 christos return bfd_elf_allocate_object (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_s390_obj_tdata)); 717 1.1 skrll } 718 1.1 skrll 719 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 720 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_object_p (bfd *abfd) 721 1.1 skrll { 722 1.1 skrll /* Set the right machine number for an s390 elf32 file. */ 723 1.1 skrll return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_s390, bfd_mach_s390_64); 724 1.1 skrll } 725 1.1 skrll 726 1.1 skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash table. */ 727 1.1 skrll 728 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table 729 1.1 skrll { 730 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_table elf; 731 1.1 skrll 732 1.1 skrll /* Short-cuts to get to dynamic linker sections. */ 733 1.1.1.3 christos asection *irelifunc; 734 1.1.1.11 christos asection *plt_eh_frame; 735 1.1.1.11 christos 736 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_ctx *plt_cfe_ctx; 737 1.1.1.11 christos asection *plt_sframe; 738 1.1.1.11 christos /* The .sframe helper object for .plt section. */ 739 1.1.1.11 christos const struct elf_s390x_sframe_plt *sframe_plt; 740 1.1 skrll 741 1.1 skrll union { 742 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma refcount; 743 1.1 skrll bfd_vma offset; 744 1.1 skrll } tls_ldm_got; 745 1.1 skrll 746 1.1.1.6 christos /* Options passed from the linker. */ 747 1.1.1.6 christos struct s390_elf_params *params; 748 1.1 skrll }; 749 1.1 skrll 750 1.1 skrll /* Get the s390 ELF linker hash table from a link_info structure. */ 751 1.1 skrll 752 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_s390_hash_table(p) \ 753 1.1.1.9 christos ((is_elf_hash_table ((p)->hash) \ 754 1.1.1.9 christos && elf_hash_table_id (elf_hash_table (p)) == S390_ELF_DATA) \ 755 1.1.1.9 christos ? (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) (p)->hash : NULL) 756 1.1 skrll 757 1.1.1.3 christos #define ELF64 1 758 1.1.1.3 christos #include "elf-s390-common.c" 759 1.1.1.3 christos 760 1.1 skrll /* Create an entry in an s390 ELF linker hash table. */ 761 1.1 skrll 762 1.1 skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry * 763 1.1.1.3 christos link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry, 764 1.1.1.3 christos struct bfd_hash_table *table, 765 1.1.1.3 christos const char *string) 766 1.1 skrll { 767 1.1 skrll /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a 768 1.1 skrll subclass. */ 769 1.1 skrll if (entry == NULL) 770 1.1 skrll { 771 1.1 skrll entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table, 772 1.1 skrll sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry)); 773 1.1 skrll if (entry == NULL) 774 1.1 skrll return entry; 775 1.1 skrll } 776 1.1 skrll 777 1.1 skrll /* Call the allocation method of the superclass. */ 778 1.1 skrll entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string); 779 1.1 skrll if (entry != NULL) 780 1.1 skrll { 781 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh; 782 1.1 skrll 783 1.1 skrll eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) entry; 784 1.1 skrll eh->gotplt_refcount = 0; 785 1.1 skrll eh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN; 786 1.1.1.3 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_address = 0; 787 1.1.1.3 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_section = NULL; 788 1.1 skrll } 789 1.1 skrll 790 1.1 skrll return entry; 791 1.1 skrll } 792 1.1 skrll 793 1.1 skrll /* Create an s390 ELF linker hash table. */ 794 1.1 skrll 795 1.1 skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table * 796 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd) 797 1.1 skrll { 798 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *ret; 799 1.1.1.9 christos size_t amt = sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table); 800 1.1 skrll 801 1.1.1.4 christos ret = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) bfd_zmalloc (amt); 802 1.1 skrll if (ret == NULL) 803 1.1 skrll return NULL; 804 1.1 skrll 805 1.1 skrll if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&ret->elf, abfd, link_hash_newfunc, 806 1.1.1.11 christos sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry))) 807 1.1 skrll { 808 1.1 skrll free (ret); 809 1.1 skrll return NULL; 810 1.1 skrll } 811 1.1 skrll 812 1.1 skrll return &ret->elf.root; 813 1.1 skrll } 814 1.1 skrll 815 1.1 skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry. */ 816 1.1 skrll 817 1.1 skrll static void 818 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info, 819 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *dir, 820 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *ind) 821 1.1 skrll { 822 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *edir, *eind; 823 1.1 skrll 824 1.1 skrll edir = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) dir; 825 1.1 skrll eind = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) ind; 826 1.1 skrll 827 1.1 skrll if (ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect 828 1.1 skrll && dir->got.refcount <= 0) 829 1.1 skrll { 830 1.1 skrll edir->tls_type = eind->tls_type; 831 1.1 skrll eind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN; 832 1.1 skrll } 833 1.1 skrll 834 1.1 skrll if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 835 1.1 skrll && ind->root.type != bfd_link_hash_indirect 836 1.1 skrll && dir->dynamic_adjusted) 837 1.1 skrll { 838 1.1 skrll /* If called to transfer flags for a weakdef during processing 839 1.1 skrll of elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol, don't copy non_got_ref. 840 1.1 skrll We clear it ourselves for ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS. */ 841 1.1.1.6 christos if (dir->versioned != versioned_hidden) 842 1.1.1.6 christos dir->ref_dynamic |= ind->ref_dynamic; 843 1.1 skrll dir->ref_regular |= ind->ref_regular; 844 1.1 skrll dir->ref_regular_nonweak |= ind->ref_regular_nonweak; 845 1.1 skrll dir->needs_plt |= ind->needs_plt; 846 1.1 skrll } 847 1.1 skrll else 848 1.1 skrll _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, dir, ind); 849 1.1 skrll } 850 1.1 skrll 851 1.1 skrll static int 852 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_tls_transition (struct bfd_link_info *info, 853 1.1.1.3 christos int r_type, 854 1.1.1.3 christos int is_local) 855 1.1 skrll { 856 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info)) 857 1.1 skrll return r_type; 858 1.1 skrll 859 1.1 skrll switch (r_type) 860 1.1 skrll { 861 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64: 862 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64: 863 1.1 skrll if (is_local) 864 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_LE64; 865 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_IE64; 866 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64: 867 1.1 skrll if (is_local) 868 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_LE64; 869 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_GOTIE64; 870 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64: 871 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_LE64; 872 1.1 skrll } 873 1.1 skrll 874 1.1 skrll return r_type; 875 1.1 skrll } 876 1.1 skrll 877 1.1 skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and 878 1.1 skrll allocate space in the global offset table or procedure linkage 879 1.1 skrll table. */ 880 1.1 skrll 881 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 882 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_check_relocs (bfd *abfd, 883 1.1.1.2 christos struct bfd_link_info *info, 884 1.1.1.2 christos asection *sec, 885 1.1.1.2 christos const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs) 886 1.1 skrll { 887 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 888 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr; 889 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes; 890 1.1 skrll const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel; 891 1.1 skrll const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel_end; 892 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc; 893 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts; 894 1.1 skrll int tls_type, old_tls_type; 895 1.1 skrll 896 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_relocatable (info)) 897 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 898 1.1 skrll 899 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (is_s390_elf (abfd)); 900 1.1 skrll 901 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 902 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL) 903 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 904 1.1.1.2 christos 905 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (abfd); 906 1.1 skrll sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (abfd); 907 1.1 skrll local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd); 908 1.1 skrll 909 1.1 skrll sreloc = NULL; 910 1.1 skrll 911 1.1 skrll rel_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count; 912 1.1 skrll for (rel = relocs; rel < rel_end; rel++) 913 1.1 skrll { 914 1.1 skrll unsigned int r_type; 915 1.1.1.6 christos unsigned int r_symndx; 916 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry *h; 917 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *isym; 918 1.1 skrll 919 1.1 skrll r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info); 920 1.1 skrll 921 1.1 skrll if (r_symndx >= NUM_SHDR_ENTRIES (symtab_hdr)) 922 1.1 skrll { 923 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 924 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: bad symbol index: %d"), 925 1.1.1.6 christos abfd, r_symndx); 926 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 927 1.1 skrll } 928 1.1 skrll 929 1.1 skrll if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info) 930 1.1.1.3 christos { 931 1.1.1.3 christos /* A local symbol. */ 932 1.1.1.9 christos isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache, 933 1.1.1.3 christos abfd, r_symndx); 934 1.1.1.3 christos if (isym == NULL) 935 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 936 1.1.1.3 christos 937 1.1.1.3 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC) 938 1.1.1.3 christos { 939 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *plt; 940 1.1.1.3 christos 941 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL) 942 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.dynobj = abfd; 943 1.1.1.3 christos 944 1.1.1.3 christos if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info)) 945 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 946 1.1.1.3 christos 947 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_got_refcounts == NULL) 948 1.1.1.3 christos { 949 1.1.1.3 christos if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr)) 950 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 951 1.1.1.3 christos local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd); 952 1.1.1.3 christos } 953 1.1.1.3 christos plt = elf_s390_local_plt (abfd); 954 1.1.1.3 christos plt[r_symndx].plt.refcount++; 955 1.1.1.3 christos } 956 1.1.1.3 christos h = NULL; 957 1.1.1.3 christos } 958 1.1 skrll else 959 1.1 skrll { 960 1.1 skrll h = sym_hashes[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info]; 961 1.1 skrll while (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect 962 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning) 963 1.1 skrll h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) h->root.u.i.link; 964 1.1 skrll } 965 1.1 skrll 966 1.1 skrll /* Create got section and local_got_refcounts array if they 967 1.1 skrll are needed. */ 968 1.1 skrll r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info, 969 1.1 skrll ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info), 970 1.1 skrll h == NULL); 971 1.1 skrll switch (r_type) 972 1.1 skrll { 973 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12: 974 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16: 975 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20: 976 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32: 977 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT64: 978 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT: 979 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT12: 980 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT16: 981 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT20: 982 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT32: 983 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT64: 984 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLTENT: 985 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64: 986 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12: 987 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20: 988 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64: 989 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT: 990 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64: 991 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64: 992 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL 993 1.1 skrll && local_got_refcounts == NULL) 994 1.1 skrll { 995 1.1.1.3 christos if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr)) 996 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 997 1.1.1.3 christos local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd); 998 1.1 skrll } 999 1.1.1.3 christos 1000 1.1 skrll /* Fall through. */ 1001 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF16: 1002 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF32: 1003 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF64: 1004 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPC: 1005 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPCDBL: 1006 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL) 1007 1.1 skrll { 1008 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL) 1009 1.1 skrll htab->elf.dynobj = abfd; 1010 1.1.1.6 christos if (!_bfd_elf_create_got_section (htab->elf.dynobj, info)) 1011 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1012 1.1 skrll } 1013 1.1 skrll } 1014 1.1 skrll 1015 1.1.1.3 christos if (h != NULL) 1016 1.1.1.3 christos { 1017 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL) 1018 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.dynobj = abfd; 1019 1.1.1.3 christos if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info)) 1020 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1021 1.1.1.3 christos 1022 1.1.1.3 christos /* Make sure an IFUNC symbol defined in a non-shared object 1023 1.1.1.3 christos always gets a PLT slot. */ 1024 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular) 1025 1.1.1.3 christos { 1026 1.1.1.3 christos /* The symbol is called by the dynamic loader in order 1027 1.1.1.3 christos to resolve the relocation. So it is in fact also 1028 1.1.1.3 christos referenced. */ 1029 1.1.1.3 christos h->ref_regular = 1; 1030 1.1.1.3 christos h->needs_plt = 1; 1031 1.1.1.3 christos } 1032 1.1.1.3 christos } 1033 1.1.1.3 christos 1034 1.1 skrll switch (r_type) 1035 1.1 skrll { 1036 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPC: 1037 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPCDBL: 1038 1.1.1.3 christos /* These relocs do not need a GOT slot. They just load the 1039 1.1.1.3 christos GOT pointer itself or address something else relative to 1040 1.1.1.3 christos the GOT. Since the GOT pointer has been set up above we 1041 1.1.1.3 christos are done. */ 1042 1.1 skrll break; 1043 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_GOTOFF16: 1044 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_GOTOFF32: 1045 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_GOTOFF64: 1046 1.1.1.4 christos if (h == NULL || !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) || !h->def_regular) 1047 1.1.1.4 christos break; 1048 1.1.1.6 christos /* Fall through. */ 1049 1.1 skrll 1050 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT12DBL: 1051 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT16DBL: 1052 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT24DBL: 1053 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32: 1054 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32DBL: 1055 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT64: 1056 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF16: 1057 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF32: 1058 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF64: 1059 1.1 skrll /* This symbol requires a procedure linkage table entry. We 1060 1.1 skrll actually build the entry in adjust_dynamic_symbol, 1061 1.1 skrll because this might be a case of linking PIC code which is 1062 1.1 skrll never referenced by a dynamic object, in which case we 1063 1.1 skrll don't need to generate a procedure linkage table entry 1064 1.1 skrll after all. */ 1065 1.1 skrll 1066 1.1 skrll /* If this is a local symbol, we resolve it directly without 1067 1.1 skrll creating a procedure linkage table entry. */ 1068 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 1069 1.1 skrll { 1070 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 1; 1071 1.1 skrll h->plt.refcount += 1; 1072 1.1 skrll } 1073 1.1 skrll break; 1074 1.1 skrll 1075 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT12: 1076 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT16: 1077 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT20: 1078 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT32: 1079 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT64: 1080 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLTENT: 1081 1.1 skrll /* This symbol requires either a procedure linkage table entry 1082 1.1 skrll or an entry in the local got. We actually build the entry 1083 1.1 skrll in adjust_dynamic_symbol because whether this is really a 1084 1.1 skrll global reference can change and with it the fact if we have 1085 1.1 skrll to create a plt entry or a local got entry. To be able to 1086 1.1 skrll make a once global symbol a local one we have to keep track 1087 1.1 skrll of the number of gotplt references that exist for this 1088 1.1 skrll symbol. */ 1089 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 1090 1.1 skrll { 1091 1.1 skrll ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->gotplt_refcount++; 1092 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 1; 1093 1.1 skrll h->plt.refcount += 1; 1094 1.1 skrll } 1095 1.1 skrll else 1096 1.1 skrll local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1; 1097 1.1 skrll break; 1098 1.1 skrll 1099 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64: 1100 1.1 skrll htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1; 1101 1.1 skrll break; 1102 1.1 skrll 1103 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64: 1104 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12: 1105 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20: 1106 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64: 1107 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT: 1108 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info)) 1109 1.1 skrll info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS; 1110 1.1 skrll /* Fall through */ 1111 1.1 skrll 1112 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12: 1113 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16: 1114 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20: 1115 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32: 1116 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT64: 1117 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT: 1118 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64: 1119 1.1 skrll /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry. */ 1120 1.1 skrll switch (r_type) 1121 1.1 skrll { 1122 1.1 skrll default: 1123 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12: 1124 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16: 1125 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20: 1126 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32: 1127 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT: 1128 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_NORMAL; 1129 1.1 skrll break; 1130 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64: 1131 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD; 1132 1.1 skrll break; 1133 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64: 1134 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64: 1135 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE; 1136 1.1 skrll break; 1137 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12: 1138 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20: 1139 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT: 1140 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE_NLT; 1141 1.1 skrll break; 1142 1.1 skrll } 1143 1.1 skrll 1144 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 1145 1.1 skrll { 1146 1.1 skrll h->got.refcount += 1; 1147 1.1 skrll old_tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type; 1148 1.1 skrll } 1149 1.1 skrll else 1150 1.1 skrll { 1151 1.1 skrll local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1; 1152 1.1 skrll old_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx]; 1153 1.1 skrll } 1154 1.1 skrll /* If a TLS symbol is accessed using IE at least once, 1155 1.1 skrll there is no point to use dynamic model for it. */ 1156 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type != tls_type && old_tls_type != GOT_UNKNOWN) 1157 1.1 skrll { 1158 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type == GOT_NORMAL || tls_type == GOT_NORMAL) 1159 1.1 skrll { 1160 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler 1161 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 1162 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB: `%s' accessed both as normal and thread local symbol"), 1163 1.1 skrll abfd, h->root.root.string); 1164 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1165 1.1 skrll } 1166 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type > tls_type) 1167 1.1 skrll tls_type = old_tls_type; 1168 1.1 skrll } 1169 1.1 skrll 1170 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type != tls_type) 1171 1.1 skrll { 1172 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 1173 1.1 skrll elf_s390_hash_entry (h)->tls_type = tls_type; 1174 1.1 skrll else 1175 1.1 skrll elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] = tls_type; 1176 1.1 skrll } 1177 1.1 skrll 1178 1.1 skrll if (r_type != R_390_TLS_IE64) 1179 1.1 skrll break; 1180 1.1 skrll /* Fall through */ 1181 1.1 skrll 1182 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LE64: 1183 1.1.1.4 christos /* For static linking and executables this reloc will be 1184 1.1.1.4 christos calculated at linktime otherwise a TLS_TPOFF runtime 1185 1.1.1.4 christos reloc will be generated. */ 1186 1.1.1.4 christos if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64 && bfd_link_pie (info)) 1187 1.1.1.4 christos break; 1188 1.1.1.4 christos 1189 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info)) 1190 1.1 skrll break; 1191 1.1 skrll info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS; 1192 1.1 skrll /* Fall through */ 1193 1.1 skrll 1194 1.1 skrll case R_390_8: 1195 1.1 skrll case R_390_16: 1196 1.1 skrll case R_390_32: 1197 1.1 skrll case R_390_64: 1198 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC12DBL: 1199 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16: 1200 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16DBL: 1201 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC24DBL: 1202 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32: 1203 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32DBL: 1204 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC64: 1205 1.1.1.4 christos if (h != NULL && bfd_link_executable (info)) 1206 1.1 skrll { 1207 1.1 skrll /* If this reloc is in a read-only section, we might 1208 1.1 skrll need a copy reloc. We can't check reliably at this 1209 1.1 skrll stage whether the section is read-only, as input 1210 1.1 skrll sections have not yet been mapped to output sections. 1211 1.1 skrll Tentatively set the flag for now, and correct in 1212 1.1 skrll adjust_dynamic_symbol. */ 1213 1.1 skrll h->non_got_ref = 1; 1214 1.1 skrll 1215 1.1.1.4 christos if (!bfd_link_pic (info)) 1216 1.1.1.3 christos { 1217 1.1.1.3 christos /* We may need a .plt entry if the function this reloc 1218 1.1.1.3 christos refers to is in a shared lib. */ 1219 1.1.1.3 christos h->plt.refcount += 1; 1220 1.1.1.3 christos } 1221 1.1 skrll } 1222 1.1 skrll 1223 1.1 skrll /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc 1224 1.1 skrll against a global symbol, or a non PC relative reloc 1225 1.1 skrll against a local symbol, then we need to copy the reloc 1226 1.1 skrll into the shared library. However, if we are linking with 1227 1.1 skrll -Bsymbolic, we do not need to copy a reloc against a 1228 1.1 skrll global symbol which is defined in an object we are 1229 1.1 skrll including in the link (i.e., DEF_REGULAR is set). At 1230 1.1 skrll this point we have not seen all the input files, so it is 1231 1.1 skrll possible that DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set 1232 1.1 skrll later (it is never cleared). In case of a weak definition, 1233 1.1 skrll DEF_REGULAR may be cleared later by a strong definition in 1234 1.1 skrll a shared library. We account for that possibility below by 1235 1.1 skrll storing information in the relocs_copied field of the hash 1236 1.1 skrll table entry. A similar situation occurs when creating 1237 1.1 skrll shared libraries and symbol visibility changes render the 1238 1.1 skrll symbol local. 1239 1.1 skrll 1240 1.1 skrll If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we 1241 1.1 skrll may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a 1242 1.1 skrll dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the 1243 1.1 skrll symbol. */ 1244 1.1.1.4 christos if ((bfd_link_pic (info) 1245 1.1 skrll && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 1246 1.1 skrll && ((ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16 1247 1.1.1.4 christos && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC12DBL 1248 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16DBL 1249 1.1.1.4 christos && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC24DBL 1250 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32 1251 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32DBL 1252 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC64) 1253 1.1 skrll || (h != NULL 1254 1.1.1.2 christos && (! SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h) 1255 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak 1256 1.1 skrll || !h->def_regular)))) 1257 1.1 skrll || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1258 1.1.1.4 christos && !bfd_link_pic (info) 1259 1.1 skrll && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 1260 1.1 skrll && h != NULL 1261 1.1 skrll && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak 1262 1.1 skrll || !h->def_regular))) 1263 1.1 skrll { 1264 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p; 1265 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs **head; 1266 1.1 skrll 1267 1.1 skrll /* We must copy these reloc types into the output file. 1268 1.1 skrll Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for 1269 1.1 skrll this reloc. */ 1270 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL) 1271 1.1 skrll { 1272 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL) 1273 1.1 skrll htab->elf.dynobj = abfd; 1274 1.1 skrll 1275 1.1.1.2 christos sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section 1276 1.1.1.9 christos (sec, htab->elf.dynobj, 3, abfd, /*rela?*/ true); 1277 1.1 skrll 1278 1.1.1.2 christos if (sreloc == NULL) 1279 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1280 1.1 skrll } 1281 1.1 skrll 1282 1.1 skrll /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of 1283 1.1 skrll relocations we need for this symbol. */ 1284 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 1285 1.1 skrll { 1286 1.1.1.9 christos head = &h->dyn_relocs; 1287 1.1 skrll } 1288 1.1 skrll else 1289 1.1 skrll { 1290 1.1 skrll /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too. 1291 1.1 skrll We really need local syms available to do this 1292 1.1 skrll easily. Oh well. */ 1293 1.1 skrll asection *s; 1294 1.1 skrll void *vpp; 1295 1.1 skrll 1296 1.1.1.9 christos isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache, 1297 1.1.1.2 christos abfd, r_symndx); 1298 1.1.1.2 christos if (isym == NULL) 1299 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1300 1.1 skrll 1301 1.1.1.2 christos s = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx); 1302 1.1.1.2 christos if (s == NULL) 1303 1.1.1.2 christos s = sec; 1304 1.1.1.2 christos 1305 1.1 skrll vpp = &elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel; 1306 1.1.1.3 christos head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp; 1307 1.1 skrll } 1308 1.1 skrll 1309 1.1 skrll p = *head; 1310 1.1 skrll if (p == NULL || p->sec != sec) 1311 1.1 skrll { 1312 1.1.1.9 christos size_t amt = sizeof *p; 1313 1.1.1.3 christos p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *) 1314 1.1 skrll bfd_alloc (htab->elf.dynobj, amt)); 1315 1.1 skrll if (p == NULL) 1316 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1317 1.1 skrll p->next = *head; 1318 1.1 skrll *head = p; 1319 1.1 skrll p->sec = sec; 1320 1.1 skrll p->count = 0; 1321 1.1 skrll p->pc_count = 0; 1322 1.1 skrll } 1323 1.1 skrll 1324 1.1 skrll p->count += 1; 1325 1.1 skrll if (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16 1326 1.1.1.4 christos || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC12DBL 1327 1.1.1.4 christos || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL 1328 1.1.1.12 christos || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC24DBL 1329 1.1 skrll || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32 1330 1.1 skrll || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32DBL 1331 1.1 skrll || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC64) 1332 1.1 skrll p->pc_count += 1; 1333 1.1 skrll } 1334 1.1 skrll break; 1335 1.1 skrll 1336 1.1 skrll /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy. 1337 1.1 skrll Reconstruct it for later use during GC. */ 1338 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT: 1339 1.1 skrll if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_offset)) 1340 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1341 1.1 skrll break; 1342 1.1 skrll 1343 1.1 skrll /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually 1344 1.1 skrll used. Record for later use during GC. */ 1345 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY: 1346 1.1.1.8 christos if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_addend)) 1347 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1348 1.1 skrll break; 1349 1.1 skrll 1350 1.1 skrll default: 1351 1.1 skrll break; 1352 1.1 skrll } 1353 1.1 skrll } 1354 1.1 skrll 1355 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1356 1.1 skrll } 1357 1.1 skrll 1358 1.1 skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against GC for a given 1359 1.1 skrll relocation. */ 1360 1.1 skrll 1361 1.1 skrll static asection * 1362 1.1 skrll elf_s390_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec, 1363 1.1 skrll struct bfd_link_info *info, 1364 1.1.1.12 christos struct elf_reloc_cookie *cookie, 1365 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry *h, 1366 1.1.1.12 christos unsigned int symndx) 1367 1.1 skrll { 1368 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 1369 1.1.1.12 christos switch (ELF64_R_TYPE (cookie->rel->r_info)) 1370 1.1 skrll { 1371 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT: 1372 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY: 1373 1.1 skrll return NULL; 1374 1.1 skrll } 1375 1.1 skrll 1376 1.1.1.12 christos return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, cookie, h, symndx); 1377 1.1 skrll } 1378 1.1 skrll 1379 1.1 skrll /* Make sure we emit a GOT entry if the symbol was supposed to have a PLT 1380 1.1 skrll entry but we found we will not create any. Called when we find we will 1381 1.1 skrll not have any PLT for this symbol, by for example 1382 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol when we're doing a proper dynamic link, 1383 1.1.1.11 christos or elf_s390_late_size_sections if no dynamic sections will be 1384 1.1 skrll created (we're only linking static objects). */ 1385 1.1 skrll 1386 1.1 skrll static void 1387 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_adjust_gotplt (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *h) 1388 1.1 skrll { 1389 1.1 skrll if (h->elf.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning) 1390 1.1 skrll h = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h->elf.root.u.i.link; 1391 1.1 skrll 1392 1.1 skrll if (h->gotplt_refcount <= 0) 1393 1.1 skrll return; 1394 1.1 skrll 1395 1.1 skrll /* We simply add the number of gotplt references to the number 1396 1.1 skrll * of got references for this symbol. */ 1397 1.1 skrll h->elf.got.refcount += h->gotplt_refcount; 1398 1.1 skrll h->gotplt_refcount = -1; 1399 1.1 skrll } 1400 1.1 skrll 1401 1.1 skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a 1402 1.1 skrll regular object. The current definition is in some section of the 1403 1.1 skrll dynamic object, but we're not including those sections. We have to 1404 1.1 skrll change the definition to something the rest of the link can 1405 1.1 skrll understand. */ 1406 1.1 skrll 1407 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 1408 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info, 1409 1.1.1.2 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *h) 1410 1.1 skrll { 1411 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 1412 1.1.1.6 christos asection *s, *srel; 1413 1.1 skrll 1414 1.1.1.3 christos /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT. */ 1415 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)) 1416 1.1.1.4 christos { 1417 1.1.1.4 christos /* All local STT_GNU_IFUNC references must be treated as local 1418 1.1.1.4 christos calls via local PLT. */ 1419 1.1.1.4 christos if (h->ref_regular && SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)) 1420 1.1.1.4 christos { 1421 1.1.1.4 christos bfd_size_type pc_count = 0, count = 0; 1422 1.1.1.4 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp; 1423 1.1.1.4 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p; 1424 1.1.1.4 christos 1425 1.1.1.9 christos for (pp = &h->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; ) 1426 1.1.1.4 christos { 1427 1.1.1.4 christos pc_count += p->pc_count; 1428 1.1.1.4 christos p->count -= p->pc_count; 1429 1.1.1.4 christos p->pc_count = 0; 1430 1.1.1.4 christos count += p->count; 1431 1.1.1.4 christos if (p->count == 0) 1432 1.1.1.4 christos *pp = p->next; 1433 1.1.1.4 christos else 1434 1.1.1.4 christos pp = &p->next; 1435 1.1.1.4 christos } 1436 1.1.1.4 christos 1437 1.1.1.4 christos if (pc_count || count) 1438 1.1.1.4 christos { 1439 1.1.1.4 christos h->needs_plt = 1; 1440 1.1.1.4 christos h->non_got_ref = 1; 1441 1.1.1.4 christos if (h->plt.refcount <= 0) 1442 1.1.1.4 christos h->plt.refcount = 1; 1443 1.1.1.4 christos else 1444 1.1.1.4 christos h->plt.refcount += 1; 1445 1.1.1.4 christos } 1446 1.1.1.4 christos } 1447 1.1.1.4 christos 1448 1.1.1.4 christos if (h->plt.refcount <= 0) 1449 1.1.1.4 christos { 1450 1.1.1.4 christos h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 1451 1.1.1.4 christos h->needs_plt = 0; 1452 1.1.1.4 christos } 1453 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1454 1.1.1.4 christos } 1455 1.1.1.3 christos 1456 1.1 skrll /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table. We 1457 1.1 skrll will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later 1458 1.1 skrll (although we could actually do it here). */ 1459 1.1 skrll if (h->type == STT_FUNC 1460 1.1 skrll || h->needs_plt) 1461 1.1 skrll { 1462 1.1 skrll if (h->plt.refcount <= 0 1463 1.1.1.2 christos || SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h) 1464 1.1.1.6 christos || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h)) 1465 1.1 skrll { 1466 1.1 skrll /* This case can occur if we saw a PLT32 reloc in an input 1467 1.1 skrll file, but the symbol was never referred to by a dynamic 1468 1.1 skrll object, or if all references were garbage collected. In 1469 1.1 skrll such a case, we don't actually need to build a procedure 1470 1.1 skrll linkage table, and we can just do a PC32 reloc instead. */ 1471 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 1472 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 0; 1473 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h); 1474 1.1 skrll } 1475 1.1 skrll 1476 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1477 1.1 skrll } 1478 1.1 skrll else 1479 1.1 skrll /* It's possible that we incorrectly decided a .plt reloc was 1480 1.1 skrll needed for an R_390_PC32 reloc to a non-function sym in 1481 1.1 skrll check_relocs. We can't decide accurately between function and 1482 1.1 skrll non-function syms in check-relocs; Objects loaded later in 1483 1.1 skrll the link may change h->type. So fix it now. */ 1484 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 1485 1.1 skrll 1486 1.1 skrll /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the 1487 1.1 skrll processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the 1488 1.1 skrll real definition first, and we can just use the same value. */ 1489 1.1.1.6 christos if (h->is_weakalias) 1490 1.1 skrll { 1491 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *def = weakdef (h); 1492 1.1.1.6 christos BFD_ASSERT (def->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined); 1493 1.1.1.6 christos h->root.u.def.section = def->root.u.def.section; 1494 1.1.1.6 christos h->root.u.def.value = def->root.u.def.value; 1495 1.1 skrll if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS || info->nocopyreloc) 1496 1.1.1.6 christos h->non_got_ref = def->non_got_ref; 1497 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1498 1.1 skrll } 1499 1.1 skrll 1500 1.1 skrll /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which 1501 1.1 skrll is not a function. */ 1502 1.1 skrll 1503 1.1 skrll /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the 1504 1.1 skrll only references to the symbol are via the global offset table. 1505 1.1 skrll For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will 1506 1.1 skrll be handled correctly by relocate_section. */ 1507 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info)) 1508 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1509 1.1 skrll 1510 1.1 skrll /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the 1511 1.1 skrll GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc. */ 1512 1.1 skrll if (!h->non_got_ref) 1513 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1514 1.1 skrll 1515 1.1 skrll /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either. */ 1516 1.1 skrll if (info->nocopyreloc) 1517 1.1 skrll { 1518 1.1 skrll h->non_got_ref = 0; 1519 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1520 1.1 skrll } 1521 1.1 skrll 1522 1.1.1.6 christos /* If we don't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then 1523 1.1.1.6 christos we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc. */ 1524 1.1.1.9 christos if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS && !_bfd_elf_readonly_dynrelocs (h)) 1525 1.1 skrll { 1526 1.1.1.6 christos h->non_got_ref = 0; 1527 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1528 1.1 skrll } 1529 1.1 skrll 1530 1.1 skrll /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will 1531 1.1 skrll become part of the .bss section of the executable. There will be 1532 1.1 skrll an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section. The dynamic 1533 1.1 skrll object will contain position independent code, so all references 1534 1.1 skrll from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global 1535 1.1 skrll offset table. The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to 1536 1.1 skrll determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so 1537 1.1 skrll both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the 1538 1.1 skrll same memory location for the variable. */ 1539 1.1 skrll 1540 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 1541 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL) 1542 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1543 1.1 skrll 1544 1.1 skrll /* We must generate a R_390_COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to 1545 1.1 skrll copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the 1546 1.1 skrll runtime process image. */ 1547 1.1.1.6 christos if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0) 1548 1.1.1.6 christos { 1549 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.sdynrelro; 1550 1.1.1.6 christos srel = htab->elf.sreldynrelro; 1551 1.1.1.6 christos } 1552 1.1.1.6 christos else 1553 1.1.1.6 christos { 1554 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.sdynbss; 1555 1.1.1.6 christos srel = htab->elf.srelbss; 1556 1.1.1.6 christos } 1557 1.1.1.3 christos if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && h->size != 0) 1558 1.1 skrll { 1559 1.1.1.6 christos srel->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 1560 1.1 skrll h->needs_copy = 1; 1561 1.1 skrll } 1562 1.1 skrll 1563 1.1.1.4 christos return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, h, s); 1564 1.1 skrll } 1565 1.1 skrll 1566 1.1.1.11 christos /* Create SFrame stack trace info for the PLT entries in the .plt section. */ 1567 1.1.1.11 christos 1568 1.1.1.11 christos static bool 1569 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_create_sframe_plt (struct bfd_link_info *info) 1570 1.1.1.11 christos { 1571 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 1572 1.1.1.11 christos 1573 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int plt0_entry_size; 1574 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned char func_info; 1575 1.1.1.11 christos uint32_t fre_type; 1576 1.1.1.11 christos /* The dynamic plt section for which .sframe stack trace information is being 1577 1.1.1.11 christos created. */ 1578 1.1.1.11 christos asection *dpltsec; 1579 1.1.1.11 christos 1580 1.1.1.11 christos int err = 0; 1581 1.1.1.11 christos 1582 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_ctx **ectx = NULL; 1583 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned plt_entry_size = 0; 1584 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int num_pltn_fres = 0; 1585 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int num_pltn_entries = 0; 1586 1.1.1.11 christos const sframe_frame_row_entry * const *pltn_fres; 1587 1.1.1.11 christos 1588 1.1.1.11 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 1589 1.1.1.11 christos ectx = &htab->plt_cfe_ctx; 1590 1.1.1.11 christos dpltsec = htab->elf.splt; 1591 1.1.1.11 christos 1592 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_entry_size = htab->sframe_plt->plt0_entry_size; 1593 1.1.1.11 christos plt_entry_size = htab->sframe_plt->pltn_entry_size; 1594 1.1.1.11 christos pltn_fres = htab->sframe_plt->pltn_fres; 1595 1.1.1.11 christos num_pltn_fres = htab->sframe_plt->pltn_num_fres; 1596 1.1.1.11 christos num_pltn_entries = (dpltsec->size - plt0_entry_size) / plt_entry_size; 1597 1.1.1.11 christos 1598 1.1.1.12 christos *ectx = sframe_encode (SFRAME_VERSION_3, 1599 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_F_FDE_FUNC_START_PCREL, 1600 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_ABI_S390X_ENDIAN_BIG, 1601 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_CFA_FIXED_FP_INVALID, 1602 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_CFA_FIXED_RA_INVALID, 1603 1.1.1.11 christos &err); 1604 1.1.1.11 christos 1605 1.1.1.11 christos /* FRE type is dependent on the size of the function. */ 1606 1.1.1.11 christos fre_type = sframe_calc_fre_type (dpltsec->size); 1607 1.1.1.12 christos func_info = sframe_fde_create_func_info (fre_type, SFRAME_V3_FDE_PCTYPE_INC); 1608 1.1.1.11 christos 1609 1.1.1.11 christos /* Add SFrame FDE and the associated FREs for PLT0 if PLT0 has been 1610 1.1.1.11 christos generated. */ 1611 1.1.1.11 christos if (plt0_entry_size) 1612 1.1.1.11 christos { 1613 1.1.1.11 christos /* Add SFrame FDE for PLT0, the function start address is updated later 1614 1.1.1.11 christos at _bfd_elf_merge_section_sframe time. */ 1615 1.1.1.12 christos sframe_encoder_add_funcdesc_v3 (*ectx, 1616 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* func start addr. */ 1617 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_entry_size, 1618 1.1.1.11 christos func_info, 1619 1.1.1.12 christos 0, /* func_info2. */ 1620 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* Rep block size. */ 1621 1.1.1.11 christos 0 /* Num FREs. */); 1622 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_frame_row_entry plt0_fre; 1623 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int num_plt0_fres = htab->sframe_plt->plt0_num_fres; 1624 1.1.1.11 christos for (unsigned int j = 0; j < num_plt0_fres; j++) 1625 1.1.1.11 christos { 1626 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_fre = *(htab->sframe_plt->plt0_fres[j]); 1627 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_add_fre (*ectx, 0, &plt0_fre); 1628 1.1.1.11 christos } 1629 1.1.1.11 christos } 1630 1.1.1.11 christos 1631 1.1.1.11 christos if (num_pltn_entries) 1632 1.1.1.11 christos { 1633 1.1.1.11 christos /* PLTn entries use an SFrame FDE of type 1634 1.1.1.12 christos SFRAME_V3_FDE_PCTYPE_MASK to exploit the repetitive 1635 1.1.1.11 christos pattern of the instructions in these entries. Using this SFrame FDE 1636 1.1.1.11 christos type helps in keeping the SFrame stack trace info for PLTn entries 1637 1.1.1.11 christos compact. */ 1638 1.1.1.12 christos func_info = sframe_fde_create_func_info (fre_type, 1639 1.1.1.12 christos SFRAME_V3_FDE_PCTYPE_MASK); 1640 1.1.1.11 christos /* Add the SFrame FDE for all PCs starting at the first PLTn entry (hence, 1641 1.1.1.11 christos function start address = plt0_entry_size. As usual, this will be 1642 1.1.1.11 christos updated later at _bfd_elf_merge_section_sframe, by when the 1643 1.1.1.11 christos sections are relocated. */ 1644 1.1.1.12 christos sframe_encoder_add_funcdesc_v3 (*ectx, 1645 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_entry_size, /* func start addr. */ 1646 1.1.1.11 christos dpltsec->size - plt0_entry_size, 1647 1.1.1.11 christos func_info, 1648 1.1.1.12 christos 0, /* func_info2. */ 1649 1.1.1.11 christos plt_entry_size, 1650 1.1.1.11 christos 0 /* Num FREs. */); 1651 1.1.1.11 christos 1652 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_frame_row_entry pltn_fre; 1653 1.1.1.11 christos /* Now add the FREs for PLTn. Simply adding the FREs suffices due 1654 1.1.1.12 christos to the usage of SFRAME_V3_FDE_PCTYPE_MASK above. */ 1655 1.1.1.11 christos for (unsigned int j = 0; j < num_pltn_fres; j++) 1656 1.1.1.11 christos { 1657 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int func_idx = plt0_entry_size ? 1 : 0; 1658 1.1.1.11 christos pltn_fre = *(pltn_fres[j]); 1659 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_add_fre (*ectx, func_idx, &pltn_fre); 1660 1.1.1.11 christos } 1661 1.1.1.11 christos } 1662 1.1.1.11 christos 1663 1.1.1.11 christos return true; 1664 1.1.1.11 christos } 1665 1.1.1.11 christos 1666 1.1.1.11 christos /* Write contents of the .sframe section. */ 1667 1.1.1.11 christos 1668 1.1.1.11 christos static bool 1669 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_write_sframe_plt (struct bfd_link_info *info) 1670 1.1.1.11 christos { 1671 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 1672 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_ctx *ectx; 1673 1.1.1.11 christos size_t sec_size; 1674 1.1.1.11 christos asection *sec; 1675 1.1.1.11 christos bfd *dynobj; 1676 1.1.1.11 christos 1677 1.1.1.11 christos int err = 0; 1678 1.1.1.11 christos 1679 1.1.1.11 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 1680 1.1.1.11 christos dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj; 1681 1.1.1.11 christos 1682 1.1.1.11 christos ectx = htab->plt_cfe_ctx; 1683 1.1.1.11 christos sec = htab->plt_sframe; 1684 1.1.1.11 christos 1685 1.1.1.11 christos BFD_ASSERT (ectx); 1686 1.1.1.11 christos 1687 1.1.1.12 christos void *contents = sframe_encoder_write (ectx, &sec_size, false, &err); 1688 1.1.1.11 christos 1689 1.1.1.11 christos sec->size = (bfd_size_type) sec_size; 1690 1.1.1.11 christos sec->contents = (unsigned char *) bfd_zalloc (dynobj, sec->size); 1691 1.1.1.11 christos sec->alloced = 1; 1692 1.1.1.11 christos memcpy (sec->contents, contents, sec_size); 1693 1.1.1.11 christos 1694 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_free (&ectx); 1695 1.1.1.11 christos 1696 1.1.1.11 christos return true; 1697 1.1.1.11 christos } 1698 1.1.1.11 christos 1699 1.1 skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for 1700 1.1 skrll dynamic relocs. */ 1701 1.1 skrll 1702 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 1703 1.1.1.2 christos allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h, 1704 1.1.1.2 christos void * inf) 1705 1.1 skrll { 1706 1.1 skrll struct bfd_link_info *info; 1707 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 1708 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p; 1709 1.1 skrll 1710 1.1 skrll if (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect) 1711 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1712 1.1 skrll 1713 1.1 skrll info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf; 1714 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 1715 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL) 1716 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1717 1.1 skrll 1718 1.1.1.3 christos /* Since STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT, we handle it 1719 1.1.1.3 christos here if it is defined and referenced in a non-shared object. */ 1720 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular) 1721 1.1.1.4 christos return s390_elf_allocate_ifunc_dyn_relocs (info, h); 1722 1.1.1.3 christos else if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created 1723 1.1.1.3 christos && h->plt.refcount > 0) 1724 1.1 skrll { 1725 1.1 skrll /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol. 1726 1.1 skrll Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic. */ 1727 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1 1728 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local) 1729 1.1 skrll { 1730 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h)) 1731 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1732 1.1 skrll } 1733 1.1 skrll 1734 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info) 1735 1.1 skrll || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, 0, h)) 1736 1.1 skrll { 1737 1.1.1.3 christos asection *s = htab->elf.splt; 1738 1.1 skrll 1739 1.1 skrll /* If this is the first .plt entry, make room for the special 1740 1.1 skrll first entry. */ 1741 1.1 skrll if (s->size == 0) 1742 1.1 skrll s->size += PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE; 1743 1.1 skrll 1744 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = s->size; 1745 1.1 skrll 1746 1.1 skrll /* If this symbol is not defined in a regular file, and we are 1747 1.1 skrll not generating a shared library, then set the symbol to this 1748 1.1 skrll location in the .plt. This is required to make function 1749 1.1 skrll pointers compare as equal between the normal executable and 1750 1.1 skrll the shared library. */ 1751 1.1.1.4 christos if (! bfd_link_pic (info) 1752 1.1 skrll && !h->def_regular) 1753 1.1 skrll { 1754 1.1 skrll h->root.u.def.section = s; 1755 1.1 skrll h->root.u.def.value = h->plt.offset; 1756 1.1 skrll } 1757 1.1 skrll 1758 1.1 skrll /* Make room for this entry. */ 1759 1.1 skrll s->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE; 1760 1.1 skrll 1761 1.1.1.8 christos /* We also need to make an entry in the .got.plt section. */ 1762 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 1763 1.1 skrll 1764 1.1 skrll /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section. */ 1765 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 1766 1.1 skrll } 1767 1.1 skrll else 1768 1.1 skrll { 1769 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 1770 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 0; 1771 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h); 1772 1.1 skrll } 1773 1.1 skrll } 1774 1.1 skrll else 1775 1.1 skrll { 1776 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 1777 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 0; 1778 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h); 1779 1.1 skrll } 1780 1.1 skrll 1781 1.1.1.12 christos /* If R_390_TLS_{IE64,GOTIE64,GOTIE12,GOTIE20,IEENT} symbol is now local to 1782 1.1 skrll the binary, we can optimize a bit. IE64 and GOTIE64 get converted 1783 1.1.1.12 christos to R_390_TLS_LE64 requiring no TLS entry. For GOTIE12, GOTIE20, and IEENT 1784 1.1 skrll we can save the dynamic TLS relocation. */ 1785 1.1 skrll if (h->got.refcount > 0 1786 1.1.1.9 christos && !bfd_link_dll (info) 1787 1.1 skrll && h->dynindx == -1 1788 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE) 1789 1.1 skrll { 1790 1.1 skrll if (elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type == GOT_TLS_IE_NLT) 1791 1.1 skrll /* For the GOTIE access without a literal pool entry the offset has 1792 1.1 skrll to be stored somewhere. The immediate value in the instruction 1793 1.1 skrll is not bit enough so the value is stored in the got. */ 1794 1.1 skrll { 1795 1.1.1.3 christos h->got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size; 1796 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 1797 1.1 skrll } 1798 1.1 skrll else 1799 1.1 skrll h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 1800 1.1 skrll } 1801 1.1 skrll else if (h->got.refcount > 0) 1802 1.1 skrll { 1803 1.1 skrll asection *s; 1804 1.1.1.9 christos bool dyn; 1805 1.1 skrll int tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type; 1806 1.1 skrll 1807 1.1 skrll /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol. 1808 1.1 skrll Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic. */ 1809 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1 1810 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local) 1811 1.1 skrll { 1812 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h)) 1813 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1814 1.1 skrll } 1815 1.1 skrll 1816 1.1.1.3 christos s = htab->elf.sgot; 1817 1.1 skrll h->got.offset = s->size; 1818 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 1819 1.1 skrll /* R_390_TLS_GD64 needs 2 consecutive GOT slots. */ 1820 1.1 skrll if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD) 1821 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 1822 1.1 skrll dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created; 1823 1.1 skrll /* R_390_TLS_IE64 needs one dynamic relocation, 1824 1.1 skrll R_390_TLS_GD64 needs one if local symbol and two if global. */ 1825 1.1 skrll if ((tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD && h->dynindx == -1) 1826 1.1 skrll || tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE) 1827 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 1828 1.1 skrll else if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD) 1829 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 1830 1.1.1.6 christos else if (!UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h) 1831 1.1.1.4 christos && (bfd_link_pic (info) 1832 1.1 skrll || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, 0, h))) 1833 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 1834 1.1 skrll } 1835 1.1 skrll else 1836 1.1 skrll h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 1837 1.1 skrll 1838 1.1.1.9 christos if (h->dyn_relocs == NULL) 1839 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1840 1.1 skrll 1841 1.1 skrll /* In the shared -Bsymbolic case, discard space allocated for 1842 1.1 skrll dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols which turn out to be 1843 1.1 skrll defined in regular objects. For the normal shared case, discard 1844 1.1 skrll space for pc-relative relocs that have become local due to symbol 1845 1.1 skrll visibility changes. */ 1846 1.1 skrll 1847 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info)) 1848 1.1 skrll { 1849 1.1.1.2 christos if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)) 1850 1.1 skrll { 1851 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp; 1852 1.1 skrll 1853 1.1.1.9 christos for (pp = &h->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; ) 1854 1.1 skrll { 1855 1.1 skrll p->count -= p->pc_count; 1856 1.1 skrll p->pc_count = 0; 1857 1.1 skrll if (p->count == 0) 1858 1.1 skrll *pp = p->next; 1859 1.1 skrll else 1860 1.1 skrll pp = &p->next; 1861 1.1 skrll } 1862 1.1 skrll } 1863 1.1 skrll 1864 1.1 skrll /* Also discard relocs on undefined weak syms with non-default 1865 1.1 skrll visibility. */ 1866 1.1.1.9 christos if (h->dyn_relocs != NULL 1867 1.1 skrll && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak) 1868 1.1 skrll { 1869 1.1.1.6 christos if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT 1870 1.1.1.6 christos || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h)) 1871 1.1.1.9 christos h->dyn_relocs = NULL; 1872 1.1 skrll 1873 1.1 skrll /* Make sure undefined weak symbols are output as a dynamic 1874 1.1 skrll symbol in PIEs. */ 1875 1.1 skrll else if (h->dynindx == -1 1876 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local) 1877 1.1 skrll { 1878 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h)) 1879 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1880 1.1 skrll } 1881 1.1 skrll } 1882 1.1 skrll } 1883 1.1 skrll else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS) 1884 1.1 skrll { 1885 1.1 skrll /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against 1886 1.1 skrll symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not 1887 1.1 skrll dynamic. */ 1888 1.1 skrll 1889 1.1 skrll if (!h->non_got_ref 1890 1.1 skrll && ((h->def_dynamic 1891 1.1 skrll && !h->def_regular) 1892 1.1 skrll || (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created 1893 1.1 skrll && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak 1894 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)))) 1895 1.1 skrll { 1896 1.1 skrll /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol. 1897 1.1 skrll Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic. */ 1898 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1 1899 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local) 1900 1.1 skrll { 1901 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h)) 1902 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1903 1.1 skrll } 1904 1.1 skrll 1905 1.1 skrll /* If that succeeded, we know we'll be keeping all the 1906 1.1 skrll relocs. */ 1907 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx != -1) 1908 1.1 skrll goto keep; 1909 1.1 skrll } 1910 1.1 skrll 1911 1.1.1.9 christos h->dyn_relocs = NULL; 1912 1.1 skrll 1913 1.1 skrll keep: ; 1914 1.1 skrll } 1915 1.1 skrll 1916 1.1 skrll /* Finally, allocate space. */ 1917 1.1.1.9 christos for (p = h->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next) 1918 1.1 skrll { 1919 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc; 1920 1.1 skrll sreloc->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 1921 1.1 skrll } 1922 1.1 skrll 1923 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 1924 1.1 skrll } 1925 1.1 skrll 1926 1.1 skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections. */ 1927 1.1 skrll 1928 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 1929 1.1.1.11 christos elf_s390_late_size_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 1930 1.1.1.11 christos struct bfd_link_info *info) 1931 1.1 skrll { 1932 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 1933 1.1 skrll bfd *dynobj; 1934 1.1 skrll asection *s; 1935 1.1.1.9 christos bool relocs; 1936 1.1 skrll bfd *ibfd; 1937 1.1 skrll 1938 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 1939 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL) 1940 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 1941 1.1.1.2 christos 1942 1.1 skrll dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj; 1943 1.1 skrll if (dynobj == NULL) 1944 1.1.1.11 christos return true; 1945 1.1 skrll 1946 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created) 1947 1.1 skrll { 1948 1.1 skrll /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter. */ 1949 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp) 1950 1.1 skrll { 1951 1.1.1.12 christos s = htab->elf.interp; 1952 1.1 skrll if (s == NULL) 1953 1.1 skrll abort (); 1954 1.1 skrll s->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER; 1955 1.1 skrll s->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER; 1956 1.1.1.11 christos s->alloced = 1; 1957 1.1 skrll } 1958 1.1 skrll } 1959 1.1 skrll 1960 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.sgot && s390_gotplt_after_got_p (info)) 1961 1.1.1.8 christos { 1962 1.1.1.8 christos /* _bfd_elf_create_got_section adds the got header size always 1963 1.1.1.8 christos to .got.plt but we need it in .got if this section comes 1964 1.1.1.8 christos first. */ 1965 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgot->size += 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 1966 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->size -= 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 1967 1.1.1.8 christos 1968 1.1.1.8 christos /* Make the _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ symbol point to the .got 1969 1.1.1.8 christos instead of .got.plt. */ 1970 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section = htab->elf.sgot; 1971 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.value = 0; 1972 1.1.1.8 christos } 1973 1.1.1.8 christos 1974 1.1 skrll /* Set up .got offsets for local syms, and space for local dynamic 1975 1.1 skrll relocs. */ 1976 1.1.1.4 christos for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next) 1977 1.1 skrll { 1978 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma *local_got; 1979 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got; 1980 1.1 skrll char *local_tls_type; 1981 1.1 skrll bfd_size_type locsymcount; 1982 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr; 1983 1.1 skrll asection *srela; 1984 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt; 1985 1.1.1.3 christos unsigned int i; 1986 1.1 skrll 1987 1.1 skrll if (! is_s390_elf (ibfd)) 1988 1.1 skrll continue; 1989 1.1 skrll 1990 1.1 skrll for (s = ibfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next) 1991 1.1 skrll { 1992 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p; 1993 1.1 skrll 1994 1.1 skrll for (p = elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel; p != NULL; p = p->next) 1995 1.1 skrll { 1996 1.1 skrll if (!bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec) 1997 1.1 skrll && bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec->output_section)) 1998 1.1 skrll { 1999 1.1 skrll /* Input section has been discarded, either because 2000 1.1 skrll it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to 2001 1.1 skrll linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding 2002 1.1 skrll the relocs too. */ 2003 1.1 skrll } 2004 1.1 skrll else if (p->count != 0) 2005 1.1 skrll { 2006 1.1 skrll srela = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc; 2007 1.1 skrll srela->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 2008 1.1 skrll if ((p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0) 2009 1.1 skrll info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL; 2010 1.1 skrll } 2011 1.1 skrll } 2012 1.1 skrll } 2013 1.1 skrll 2014 1.1 skrll local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd); 2015 1.1 skrll if (!local_got) 2016 1.1 skrll continue; 2017 1.1 skrll 2018 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd); 2019 1.1 skrll locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info; 2020 1.1 skrll end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount; 2021 1.1 skrll local_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (ibfd); 2022 1.1.1.3 christos s = htab->elf.sgot; 2023 1.1.1.3 christos srela = htab->elf.srelgot; 2024 1.1 skrll for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got, ++local_tls_type) 2025 1.1 skrll { 2026 1.1 skrll if (*local_got > 0) 2027 1.1 skrll { 2028 1.1 skrll *local_got = s->size; 2029 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 2030 1.1 skrll if (*local_tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD) 2031 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 2032 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info)) 2033 1.1 skrll srela->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 2034 1.1 skrll } 2035 1.1 skrll else 2036 1.1 skrll *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1; 2037 1.1 skrll } 2038 1.1.1.3 christos 2039 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd); 2040 1.1.1.3 christos for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++) 2041 1.1.1.3 christos { 2042 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt[i].plt.refcount > 0) 2043 1.1.1.3 christos { 2044 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[i].plt.offset = htab->elf.iplt->size; 2045 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.iplt->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE; 2046 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.igotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 2047 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.irelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 2048 1.1.1.3 christos } 2049 1.1.1.3 christos else 2050 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[i].plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1; 2051 1.1.1.3 christos } 2052 1.1 skrll } 2053 1.1 skrll 2054 1.1 skrll if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0) 2055 1.1 skrll { 2056 1.1 skrll /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for R_390_TLS_LDM64 2057 1.1 skrll relocs. */ 2058 1.1.1.3 christos htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size; 2059 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->size += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 2060 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 2061 1.1 skrll } 2062 1.1 skrll else 2063 1.1 skrll htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1; 2064 1.1 skrll 2065 1.1 skrll /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global 2066 1.1 skrll sym dynamic relocs. */ 2067 1.1.1.3 christos elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->elf, allocate_dynrelocs, info); 2068 1.1 skrll 2069 1.1.1.11 christos if (_bfd_elf_eh_frame_present (info)) 2070 1.1.1.11 christos { 2071 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame != NULL 2072 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt != NULL 2073 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0 2074 1.1.1.11 christos && !bfd_is_abs_section (htab->elf.splt->output_section)) 2075 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->size = sizeof (elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt); 2076 1.1.1.11 christos } 2077 1.1.1.11 christos 2078 1.1.1.11 christos /* No need to size the .sframe section explicitly because the write-out 2079 1.1.1.11 christos mechanism is different. Simply prep up the FDE/FRE for the 2080 1.1.1.11 christos .plt section. */ 2081 1.1.1.11 christos if (_bfd_elf_sframe_present (info)) 2082 1.1.1.11 christos { 2083 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe != NULL 2084 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt != NULL 2085 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0 2086 1.1.1.11 christos && !bfd_is_abs_section (htab->elf.splt->output_section)) 2087 1.1.1.11 christos { 2088 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_create_sframe_plt (info); 2089 1.1.1.11 christos /* FIXME - Dirty Hack. Set the size to something non-zero for now, 2090 1.1.1.11 christos so that the section does not get stripped out below. The precise 2091 1.1.1.11 christos size of this section is known only when the contents are 2092 1.1.1.11 christos serialized in _bfd_s390x_elf_write_sframe_plt. */ 2093 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe->size = sizeof (sframe_header) + 1; 2094 1.1.1.11 christos } 2095 1.1.1.11 christos } 2096 1.1.1.11 christos 2097 1.1 skrll /* We now have determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections. 2098 1.1 skrll Allocate memory for them. */ 2099 1.1.1.9 christos relocs = false; 2100 1.1 skrll for (s = dynobj->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next) 2101 1.1 skrll { 2102 1.1 skrll if ((s->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0) 2103 1.1 skrll continue; 2104 1.1 skrll 2105 1.1.1.3 christos if (s == htab->elf.splt 2106 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.sgot 2107 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.sgotplt 2108 1.1.1.11 christos || s == htab->plt_eh_frame 2109 1.1.1.11 christos || s == htab->plt_sframe 2110 1.1.1.6 christos || s == htab->elf.sdynbss 2111 1.1.1.6 christos || s == htab->elf.sdynrelro 2112 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.iplt 2113 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.igotplt 2114 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->irelifunc) 2115 1.1 skrll { 2116 1.1 skrll /* Strip this section if we don't need it; see the 2117 1.1 skrll comment below. */ 2118 1.1 skrll } 2119 1.1.1.9 christos else if (startswith (bfd_section_name (s), ".rela")) 2120 1.1 skrll { 2121 1.1.1.3 christos if (s->size != 0 && s != htab->elf.srelplt) 2122 1.1.1.9 christos { 2123 1.1.1.9 christos relocs = true; 2124 1.1.1.9 christos if (s == htab->elf.irelplt) 2125 1.1.1.9 christos { 2126 1.1.1.9 christos /* In static-pie case, there are IRELATIVE-relocs in 2127 1.1.1.9 christos .rela.iplt (htab->irelplt), which will later be grouped 2128 1.1.1.9 christos to .rela.plt. On s390, the IRELATIVE relocations are 2129 1.1.1.9 christos always located in .rela.iplt - even for non-static case. 2130 1.1.1.9 christos Ensure that DT_JMPREL, DT_PLTRELA, DT_PLTRELASZ is added 2131 1.1.1.9 christos to the dynamic section even if htab->srelplt->size == 0. 2132 1.1.1.9 christos See _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_tags in bfd/elflink.c. */ 2133 1.1.1.9 christos htab->elf.dt_jmprel_required = true; 2134 1.1.1.9 christos } 2135 1.1.1.9 christos } 2136 1.1 skrll 2137 1.1 skrll /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need 2138 1.1 skrll to copy relocs into the output file. */ 2139 1.1 skrll s->reloc_count = 0; 2140 1.1 skrll } 2141 1.1 skrll else 2142 1.1 skrll { 2143 1.1 skrll /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space. */ 2144 1.1 skrll continue; 2145 1.1 skrll } 2146 1.1 skrll 2147 1.1 skrll if (s->size == 0) 2148 1.1 skrll { 2149 1.1 skrll /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the 2150 1.1 skrll output file. This is to handle .rela.bss and 2151 1.1 skrll .rela.plt. We must create it in 2152 1.1 skrll create_dynamic_sections, because it must be created 2153 1.1 skrll before the linker maps input sections to output 2154 1.1 skrll sections. The linker does that before 2155 1.1 skrll adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that 2156 1.1 skrll function which decides whether anything needs to go 2157 1.1 skrll into these sections. */ 2158 1.1 skrll 2159 1.1 skrll s->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE; 2160 1.1 skrll continue; 2161 1.1 skrll } 2162 1.1 skrll 2163 1.1 skrll if ((s->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0) 2164 1.1 skrll continue; 2165 1.1 skrll 2166 1.1.1.11 christos /* Skip allocating contents for .sframe section as it is written 2167 1.1.1.11 christos out differently. See below. */ 2168 1.1.1.11 christos if (s == htab->plt_sframe) 2169 1.1.1.11 christos continue; 2170 1.1.1.11 christos 2171 1.1 skrll /* Allocate memory for the section contents. We use bfd_zalloc 2172 1.1 skrll here in case unused entries are not reclaimed before the 2173 1.1 skrll section's contents are written out. This should not happen, 2174 1.1 skrll but this way if it does, we get a R_390_NONE reloc instead 2175 1.1 skrll of garbage. */ 2176 1.1 skrll s->contents = (bfd_byte *) bfd_zalloc (dynobj, s->size); 2177 1.1 skrll if (s->contents == NULL) 2178 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 2179 1.1.1.11 christos s->alloced = 1; 2180 1.1.1.11 christos } 2181 1.1.1.11 christos 2182 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame != NULL 2183 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_eh_frame->contents != NULL) 2184 1.1.1.11 christos { 2185 1.1.1.11 christos memcpy (htab->plt_eh_frame->contents, 2186 1.1.1.11 christos elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt, 2187 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->size); 2188 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (dynobj, htab->elf.splt->size, 2189 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->contents + PLT_FDE_LEN_OFFSET); 2190 1.1.1.11 christos } 2191 1.1.1.11 christos 2192 1.1.1.11 christos if (_bfd_elf_sframe_present (info)) 2193 1.1.1.11 christos { 2194 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe != NULL 2195 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt != NULL 2196 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0 2197 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_sframe->contents == NULL) 2198 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_write_sframe_plt (info); 2199 1.1 skrll } 2200 1.1 skrll 2201 1.1.1.9 christos return _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_tags (output_bfd, info, relocs); 2202 1.1 skrll } 2203 1.1 skrll 2204 1.1 skrll /* Return the base VMA address which should be subtracted from real addresses 2205 1.1 skrll when resolving @dtpoff relocation. 2206 1.1 skrll This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr. */ 2207 1.1 skrll 2208 1.1 skrll static bfd_vma 2209 1.1.1.3 christos dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info) 2210 1.1 skrll { 2211 1.1 skrll /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already. */ 2212 1.1 skrll if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL) 2213 1.1 skrll return 0; 2214 1.1 skrll return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma; 2215 1.1 skrll } 2216 1.1 skrll 2217 1.1 skrll /* Return the relocation value for @tpoff relocation 2218 1.1 skrll if STT_TLS virtual address is ADDRESS. */ 2219 1.1 skrll 2220 1.1 skrll static bfd_vma 2221 1.1.1.3 christos tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address) 2222 1.1 skrll { 2223 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info); 2224 1.1 skrll 2225 1.1 skrll /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already. */ 2226 1.1 skrll if (htab->tls_sec == NULL) 2227 1.1 skrll return 0; 2228 1.1 skrll return htab->tls_size + htab->tls_sec->vma - address; 2229 1.1 skrll } 2230 1.1 skrll 2231 1.1 skrll /* Complain if TLS instruction relocation is against an invalid 2232 1.1 skrll instruction. */ 2233 1.1 skrll 2234 1.1 skrll static void 2235 1.1.1.3 christos invalid_tls_insn (bfd *input_bfd, 2236 1.1.1.3 christos asection *input_section, 2237 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela *rel) 2238 1.1 skrll { 2239 1.1 skrll reloc_howto_type *howto; 2240 1.1 skrll 2241 1.1 skrll howto = elf_howto_table + ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info); 2242 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler 2243 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 2244 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): invalid instruction for TLS relocation %s"), 2245 1.1 skrll input_bfd, 2246 1.1 skrll input_section, 2247 1.1.1.7 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset, 2248 1.1 skrll howto->name); 2249 1.1 skrll bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value); 2250 1.1 skrll } 2251 1.1 skrll 2252 1.1 skrll /* Relocate a 390 ELF section. */ 2253 1.1 skrll 2254 1.1.1.9 christos static int 2255 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd, 2256 1.1.1.2 christos struct bfd_link_info *info, 2257 1.1.1.2 christos bfd *input_bfd, 2258 1.1.1.2 christos asection *input_section, 2259 1.1.1.2 christos bfd_byte *contents, 2260 1.1.1.2 christos Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs, 2261 1.1.1.2 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms, 2262 1.1.1.2 christos asection **local_sections) 2263 1.1 skrll { 2264 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 2265 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr; 2266 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes; 2267 1.1 skrll bfd_vma *local_got_offsets; 2268 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela *rel; 2269 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela *relend; 2270 1.1 skrll 2271 1.1.1.8 christos if (!is_s390_elf (input_bfd)) 2272 1.1.1.8 christos { 2273 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_wrong_format); 2274 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 2275 1.1.1.8 christos } 2276 1.1 skrll 2277 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 2278 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL) 2279 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 2280 1.1.1.2 christos 2281 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (input_bfd); 2282 1.1 skrll sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd); 2283 1.1 skrll local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd); 2284 1.1 skrll 2285 1.1 skrll rel = relocs; 2286 1.1 skrll relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count; 2287 1.1 skrll for (; rel < relend; rel++) 2288 1.1 skrll { 2289 1.1 skrll unsigned int r_type; 2290 1.1 skrll reloc_howto_type *howto; 2291 1.1 skrll unsigned long r_symndx; 2292 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry *h; 2293 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Sym *sym; 2294 1.1 skrll asection *sec; 2295 1.1 skrll bfd_vma off; 2296 1.1 skrll bfd_vma relocation; 2297 1.1.1.9 christos bool unresolved_reloc; 2298 1.1 skrll bfd_reloc_status_type r; 2299 1.1 skrll int tls_type; 2300 1.1.1.9 christos bool resolved_to_zero; 2301 1.1.1.12 christos bool relax; 2302 1.1 skrll 2303 1.1 skrll r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info); 2304 1.1 skrll if (r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT 2305 1.1 skrll || r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTENTRY) 2306 1.1 skrll continue; 2307 1.1 skrll if (r_type >= (int) R_390_max) 2308 1.1 skrll { 2309 1.1 skrll bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value); 2310 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 2311 1.1 skrll } 2312 1.1 skrll 2313 1.1 skrll howto = elf_howto_table + r_type; 2314 1.1 skrll r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info); 2315 1.1 skrll 2316 1.1 skrll h = NULL; 2317 1.1 skrll sym = NULL; 2318 1.1 skrll sec = NULL; 2319 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 2320 1.1 skrll if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info) 2321 1.1 skrll { 2322 1.1 skrll sym = local_syms + r_symndx; 2323 1.1 skrll sec = local_sections[r_symndx]; 2324 1.1.1.3 christos 2325 1.1.1.3 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC) 2326 1.1.1.3 christos { 2327 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (input_bfd); 2328 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt == NULL) 2329 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 2330 1.1.1.3 christos 2331 1.1.1.3 christos /* Address of the PLT slot. */ 2332 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma 2333 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset 2334 1.1.1.3 christos + local_plt[r_symndx].plt.offset); 2335 1.1.1.3 christos 2336 1.1.1.3 christos switch (r_type) 2337 1.1.1.3 christos { 2338 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLTOFF16: 2339 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLTOFF32: 2340 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLTOFF64: 2341 1.1.1.8 christos relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info); 2342 1.1.1.4 christos break; 2343 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT12: 2344 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT16: 2345 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT20: 2346 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT32: 2347 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT64: 2348 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLTENT: 2349 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT12: 2350 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT16: 2351 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT20: 2352 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT32: 2353 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT64: 2354 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTENT: 2355 1.1.1.3 christos { 2356 1.1.1.3 christos /* Write the PLT slot address into the GOT slot. */ 2357 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation, 2358 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + 2359 1.1.1.3 christos local_got_offsets[r_symndx]); 2360 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (local_got_offsets[r_symndx] + 2361 1.1.1.8 christos s390_got_offset (info)); 2362 1.1.1.3 christos 2363 1.1.1.3 christos if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT) 2364 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info); 2365 1.1.1.3 christos break; 2366 1.1.1.3 christos } 2367 1.1.1.3 christos default: 2368 1.1.1.3 christos break; 2369 1.1.1.3 christos } 2370 1.1.1.3 christos /* The output section is needed later in 2371 1.1.1.3 christos finish_dynamic_section when creating the dynamic 2372 1.1.1.3 christos relocation. */ 2373 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[r_symndx].sec = sec; 2374 1.1.1.3 christos goto do_relocation; 2375 1.1.1.3 christos } 2376 1.1.1.3 christos else 2377 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sec, rel); 2378 1.1 skrll } 2379 1.1 skrll else 2380 1.1 skrll { 2381 1.1.1.9 christos bool warned ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED; 2382 1.1.1.9 christos bool ignored ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED; 2383 1.1 skrll 2384 1.1 skrll RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rel, 2385 1.1 skrll r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes, 2386 1.1 skrll h, sec, relocation, 2387 1.1.1.4 christos unresolved_reloc, warned, ignored); 2388 1.1 skrll } 2389 1.1 skrll 2390 1.1.1.3 christos if (sec != NULL && discarded_section (sec)) 2391 1.1.1.2 christos RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section, 2392 1.1.1.12 christos rel, 1, relend, R_390_NONE, 2393 1.1.1.12 christos howto, 0, contents); 2394 1.1 skrll 2395 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_relocatable (info)) 2396 1.1 skrll continue; 2397 1.1 skrll 2398 1.1.1.6 christos resolved_to_zero = (h != NULL 2399 1.1.1.6 christos && UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h)); 2400 1.1.1.6 christos 2401 1.1.1.12 christos /* Rewrite instructions and related relocations if (1) relaxation 2402 1.1.1.12 christos disabled by default, (2) enabled by target, or (3) enabled by 2403 1.1.1.12 christos user. Suppress rewriting if linker option --no-relax is used. */ 2404 1.1.1.12 christos relax = info->disable_target_specific_optimizations <= 1; 2405 1.1.1.12 christos 2406 1.1 skrll switch (r_type) 2407 1.1 skrll { 2408 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT12: 2409 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT16: 2410 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT20: 2411 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT32: 2412 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT64: 2413 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLTENT: 2414 1.1 skrll /* There are three cases for a GOTPLT relocation. 1) The 2415 1.1 skrll relocation is against the jump slot entry of a plt that 2416 1.1 skrll will get emitted to the output file. 2) The relocation 2417 1.1 skrll is against the jump slot of a plt entry that has been 2418 1.1 skrll removed. elf_s390_adjust_gotplt has created a GOT entry 2419 1.1 skrll as replacement. 3) The relocation is against a local symbol. 2420 1.1 skrll Cases 2) and 3) are the same as the GOT relocation code 2421 1.1 skrll so we just have to test for case 1 and fall through for 2422 1.1 skrll the other two. */ 2423 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL && h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1) 2424 1.1 skrll { 2425 1.1 skrll bfd_vma plt_index; 2426 1.1 skrll 2427 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)) 2428 1.1.1.3 christos { 2429 1.1.1.8 christos /* Entry indices of .iplt and .igot.plt match 2430 1.1.1.8 christos 1:1. No magic PLT first entry here. */ 2431 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index = h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE; 2432 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 2433 1.1.1.8 christos + s390_gotplt_offset (info) 2434 1.1.1.8 christos + htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset); 2435 1.1.1.3 christos } 2436 1.1.1.3 christos else 2437 1.1.1.3 christos { 2438 1.1.1.8 christos plt_index = ((h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) 2439 1.1.1.8 christos / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE); 2440 1.1.1.8 christos 2441 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 2442 1.1.1.8 christos + s390_gotplt_offset (info)); 2443 1.1.1.3 christos } 2444 1.1.1.8 christos if (r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT) 2445 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info); 2446 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 2447 1.1 skrll break; 2448 1.1 skrll } 2449 1.1 skrll /* Fall through. */ 2450 1.1 skrll 2451 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12: 2452 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16: 2453 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20: 2454 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32: 2455 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT64: 2456 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT: 2457 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the global 2458 1.1 skrll offset table. */ 2459 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL) 2460 1.1 skrll abort (); 2461 1.1 skrll 2462 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 2463 1.1 skrll { 2464 1.1.1.9 christos bool dyn; 2465 1.1 skrll 2466 1.1 skrll off = h->got.offset; 2467 1.1 skrll dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created; 2468 1.1.1.3 christos 2469 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)) 2470 1.1.1.3 christos { 2471 1.1.1.3 christos BFD_ASSERT (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1); 2472 1.1.1.3 christos if (off == (bfd_vma)-1) 2473 1.1.1.3 christos { 2474 1.1.1.3 christos /* No explicit GOT usage so redirect to the 2475 1.1.1.3 christos got.iplt slot. */ 2476 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = (s390_gotplt_offset (info) 2477 1.1.1.8 christos + htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset 2478 1.1.1.8 christos + (h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 2479 1.1.1.8 christos * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE)); 2480 1.1.1.8 christos 2481 1.1.1.8 christos /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between 2482 1.1.1.8 christos the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not 2483 1.1.1.8 christos between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We 2484 1.1.1.8 christos add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value. */ 2485 1.1.1.8 christos if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT) 2486 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info); 2487 1.1.1.8 christos 2488 1.1.1.8 christos break; 2489 1.1.1.3 christos } 2490 1.1.1.3 christos else 2491 1.1.1.3 christos { 2492 1.1.1.3 christos /* Explicit GOT slots must contain the address 2493 1.1.1.3 christos of the PLT slot. This will be handled in 2494 1.1.1.3 christos finish_dynamic_symbol. */ 2495 1.1.1.3 christos } 2496 1.1.1.3 christos } 2497 1.1.1.4 christos else if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, 2498 1.1.1.4 christos bfd_link_pic (info), 2499 1.1.1.4 christos h) 2500 1.1.1.11 christos || SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h) 2501 1.1.1.6 christos || resolved_to_zero) 2502 1.1 skrll { 2503 1.1 skrll /* This is actually a static link, or it is a 2504 1.1 skrll -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined 2505 1.1 skrll locally, or the symbol was forced to be local 2506 1.1 skrll because of a version file. We must initialize 2507 1.1 skrll this entry in the global offset table. Since the 2508 1.1 skrll offset must always be a multiple of 2, we use the 2509 1.1 skrll least significant bit to record whether we have 2510 1.1 skrll initialized it already. 2511 1.1 skrll 2512 1.1 skrll When doing a dynamic link, we create a .rel.got 2513 1.1 skrll relocation entry to initialize the value. This 2514 1.1 skrll is done in the finish_dynamic_symbol routine. */ 2515 1.1 skrll if ((off & 1) != 0) 2516 1.1 skrll off &= ~1; 2517 1.1 skrll else 2518 1.1 skrll { 2519 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation, 2520 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off); 2521 1.1 skrll h->got.offset |= 1; 2522 1.1 skrll } 2523 1.1.1.4 christos 2524 1.1.1.8 christos /* When turning a GOT slot dereference into a direct 2525 1.1.1.8 christos reference using larl we have to make sure that 2526 1.1.1.8 christos the symbol is 1. properly aligned and 2. it is no 2527 1.1.1.8 christos ABS symbol or will become one. */ 2528 1.1.1.12 christos if (relax 2529 1.1.1.12 christos && h->def_regular 2530 1.1.1.11 christos && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h) 2531 1.1.1.4 christos /* lgrl rx,sym@GOTENT -> larl rx, sym */ 2532 1.1.1.4 christos && ((r_type == R_390_GOTENT 2533 1.1.1.4 christos && (bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, 2534 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 2) 2535 1.1.1.4 christos & 0xff0f) == 0xc408) 2536 1.1.1.4 christos /* lg rx, sym@GOT(r12) -> larl rx, sym */ 2537 1.1.1.4 christos || (r_type == R_390_GOT20 2538 1.1.1.4 christos && (bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, 2539 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 2) 2540 1.1.1.4 christos & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000 2541 1.1.1.4 christos && bfd_get_8 (input_bfd, 2542 1.1.1.8 christos contents + rel->r_offset + 3) == 0x04)) 2543 1.1.1.11 christos && !bfd_is_abs_symbol (&h->root) 2544 1.1.1.8 christos && h != htab->elf.hdynamic 2545 1.1.1.8 christos && h != htab->elf.hgot 2546 1.1.1.8 christos && h != htab->elf.hplt 2547 1.1.1.11 christos && !((h->root.u.def.value 2548 1.1.1.11 christos + sec->output_section->vma 2549 1.1.1.11 christos + sec->output_offset) & 1)) 2550 1.1.1.4 christos { 2551 1.1.1.4 christos unsigned short new_insn = 2552 1.1.1.4 christos (0xc000 | (bfd_get_8 (input_bfd, 2553 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 1) & 0xf0)); 2554 1.1.1.4 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, new_insn, 2555 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 2); 2556 1.1.1.4 christos r_type = R_390_PC32DBL; 2557 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (r_symndx, r_type); 2558 1.1.1.4 christos rel->r_addend = 2; 2559 1.1.1.4 christos howto = elf_howto_table + r_type; 2560 1.1.1.4 christos relocation = h->root.u.def.value 2561 1.1.1.4 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma 2562 1.1.1.4 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset; 2563 1.1.1.4 christos goto do_relocation; 2564 1.1.1.4 christos } 2565 1.1 skrll } 2566 1.1 skrll else 2567 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 2568 1.1 skrll } 2569 1.1 skrll else 2570 1.1 skrll { 2571 1.1 skrll if (local_got_offsets == NULL) 2572 1.1 skrll abort (); 2573 1.1 skrll 2574 1.1 skrll off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx]; 2575 1.1 skrll 2576 1.1 skrll /* The offset must always be a multiple of 8. We use 2577 1.1 skrll the least significant bit to record whether we have 2578 1.1 skrll already generated the necessary reloc. */ 2579 1.1 skrll if ((off & 1) != 0) 2580 1.1 skrll off &= ~1; 2581 1.1 skrll else 2582 1.1 skrll { 2583 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation, 2584 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off); 2585 1.1 skrll 2586 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info)) 2587 1.1 skrll { 2588 1.1 skrll asection *s; 2589 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel; 2590 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 2591 1.1 skrll 2592 1.1.1.3 christos s = htab->elf.srelgot; 2593 1.1 skrll if (s == NULL) 2594 1.1 skrll abort (); 2595 1.1 skrll 2596 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma 2597 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset 2598 1.1 skrll + off); 2599 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE); 2600 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation; 2601 1.1 skrll loc = s->contents; 2602 1.1 skrll loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 2603 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc); 2604 1.1 skrll } 2605 1.1 skrll 2606 1.1 skrll local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1; 2607 1.1 skrll } 2608 1.1 skrll } 2609 1.1 skrll 2610 1.1 skrll if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2) 2611 1.1 skrll abort (); 2612 1.1 skrll 2613 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = s390_got_offset (info) + off; 2614 1.1 skrll 2615 1.1 skrll /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between 2616 1.1 skrll the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not 2617 1.1 skrll between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We 2618 1.1 skrll add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value. */ 2619 1.1 skrll if ( r_type == R_390_GOTENT 2620 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT) 2621 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info); 2622 1.1 skrll 2623 1.1 skrll break; 2624 1.1 skrll 2625 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF16: 2626 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF32: 2627 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF64: 2628 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is relative to the start of the global offset 2629 1.1 skrll table. */ 2630 1.1 skrll 2631 1.1.1.4 christos if (h != NULL 2632 1.1.1.4 christos && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) 2633 1.1.1.4 christos && h->def_regular 2634 1.1.1.4 christos && !bfd_link_executable (info)) 2635 1.1.1.4 christos { 2636 1.1.1.4 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma 2637 1.1.1.4 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset 2638 1.1.1.4 christos + h->plt.offset 2639 1.1.1.8 christos - s390_got_pointer (info)); 2640 1.1.1.4 christos goto do_relocation; 2641 1.1.1.4 christos } 2642 1.1.1.4 christos 2643 1.1.1.8 christos relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info); 2644 1.1 skrll break; 2645 1.1 skrll 2646 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPC: 2647 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPCDBL: 2648 1.1 skrll /* Use global offset table as symbol value. */ 2649 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = s390_got_pointer (info); 2650 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 2651 1.1 skrll break; 2652 1.1 skrll 2653 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT12DBL: 2654 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT16DBL: 2655 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT24DBL: 2656 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32: 2657 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32DBL: 2658 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT64: 2659 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the 2660 1.1 skrll procedure linkage table. */ 2661 1.1 skrll 2662 1.1 skrll /* Resolve a PLT32 reloc against a local symbol directly, 2663 1.1 skrll without using the procedure linkage table. */ 2664 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL) 2665 1.1 skrll break; 2666 1.1 skrll 2667 1.1 skrll if (h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1 2668 1.1.1.4 christos || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))) 2669 1.1 skrll { 2670 1.1 skrll /* We didn't make a PLT entry for this symbol. This 2671 1.1 skrll happens when statically linking PIC code, or when 2672 1.1 skrll using -Bsymbolic. */ 2673 1.1.1.11 christos 2674 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace relative long addressing instructions of weak 2675 1.1.1.11 christos symbols, which will definitely resolve to zero, with 2676 1.1.1.11 christos either a load address of 0 or a trapping insn. 2677 1.1.1.11 christos This prevents the PLT32DBL relocation from overflowing in 2678 1.1.1.11 christos case the binary will be loaded at 4GB or more. */ 2679 1.1.1.12 christos if (relax 2680 1.1.1.12 christos && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak 2681 1.1.1.11 christos && !h->root.linker_def 2682 1.1.1.11 christos && (bfd_link_executable (info) 2683 1.1.1.11 christos || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT) 2684 1.1.1.11 christos && r_type == R_390_PLT32DBL 2685 1.1.1.11 christos && rel->r_offset >= 2) 2686 1.1.1.11 christos { 2687 1.1.1.11 christos void *insn_start = contents + rel->r_offset - 2; 2688 1.1.1.11 christos uint16_t op = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, insn_start) & 0xff0f; 2689 1.1.1.11 christos uint8_t reg = bfd_get_8 (input_bfd, insn_start + 1) & 0xf0; 2690 1.1.1.11 christos 2691 1.1.1.11 christos /* NOTE: The order of the if's is important! */ 2692 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace load address relative long (larl) with load 2693 1.1.1.11 christos address (lay) */ 2694 1.1.1.11 christos if (op == 0xc000) 2695 1.1.1.11 christos { 2696 1.1.1.11 christos /* larl rX,<weak sym> -> lay rX,0(0) */ 2697 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xe300 | reg, insn_start); 2698 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x71, insn_start + 2); 2699 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_NONE); 2700 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_addend = 0; 2701 1.1.1.11 christos continue; 2702 1.1.1.11 christos } 2703 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace branch relative and save long (brasl) with a trap. */ 2704 1.1.1.11 christos else if (op == 0xc005) 2705 1.1.1.11 christos { 2706 1.1.1.11 christos /* brasl rX,<weak sym> -> jg .+2 (6-byte trap) */ 2707 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xc0f4, insn_start); 2708 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x1, insn_start + 2); 2709 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_NONE); 2710 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_addend = 0; 2711 1.1.1.11 christos continue; 2712 1.1.1.11 christos } 2713 1.1.1.11 christos } 2714 1.1.1.11 christos 2715 1.1 skrll break; 2716 1.1 skrll } 2717 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)) 2718 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma 2719 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset 2720 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset); 2721 1.1.1.3 christos else 2722 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma 2723 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.splt->output_offset 2724 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset); 2725 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 2726 1.1 skrll break; 2727 1.1 skrll 2728 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF16: 2729 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF32: 2730 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF64: 2731 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the 2732 1.1 skrll procedure linkage table relative to the start of the GOT. */ 2733 1.1 skrll 2734 1.1 skrll /* For local symbols or if we didn't make a PLT entry for 2735 1.1 skrll this symbol resolve the symbol directly. */ 2736 1.1.1.4 christos if (h == NULL 2737 1.1 skrll || h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1 2738 1.1.1.4 christos || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))) 2739 1.1 skrll { 2740 1.1.1.8 christos relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info); 2741 1.1 skrll break; 2742 1.1 skrll } 2743 1.1 skrll 2744 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)) 2745 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma 2746 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset 2747 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset 2748 1.1.1.8 christos - s390_got_pointer (info)); 2749 1.1.1.3 christos else 2750 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma 2751 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.splt->output_offset 2752 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset 2753 1.1.1.8 christos - s390_got_pointer (info)); 2754 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 2755 1.1 skrll break; 2756 1.1 skrll 2757 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16: 2758 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC12DBL: 2759 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16DBL: 2760 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC24DBL: 2761 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32: 2762 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32DBL: 2763 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC64: 2764 1.1.1.6 christos if (h != NULL 2765 1.1.1.6 christos && bfd_link_pie (info) 2766 1.1.1.6 christos && !h->def_regular) 2767 1.1.1.6 christos { 2768 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: `%s' non-PLT reloc for symbol defined " 2769 1.1.1.6 christos "in shared library and accessed " 2770 1.1.1.6 christos "from executable " 2771 1.1.1.6 christos "(rebuild file with -fPIC ?)"), 2772 1.1.1.6 christos input_bfd, h->root.root.string); 2773 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value); 2774 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 2775 1.1.1.6 christos } 2776 1.1.1.4 christos /* The target of these relocs are instruction operands 2777 1.1.1.4 christos residing in read-only sections. We cannot emit a runtime 2778 1.1.1.4 christos reloc for it. */ 2779 1.1.1.4 christos if (h != NULL 2780 1.1.1.4 christos && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) 2781 1.1.1.4 christos && h->def_regular 2782 1.1.1.4 christos && bfd_link_pic (info)) 2783 1.1.1.4 christos { 2784 1.1.1.4 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma 2785 1.1.1.4 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset 2786 1.1.1.4 christos + h->plt.offset); 2787 1.1.1.4 christos goto do_relocation; 2788 1.1.1.4 christos } 2789 1.1.1.11 christos 2790 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace relative long addressing instructions of weak 2791 1.1.1.11 christos symbols, which will definitely resolve to zero, with 2792 1.1.1.11 christos either a load address of 0, a NOP, or a trapping insn. 2793 1.1.1.11 christos This prevents the PC32DBL relocation from overflowing in 2794 1.1.1.11 christos case the binary will be loaded at 4GB or more. */ 2795 1.1.1.12 christos if (relax 2796 1.1.1.12 christos && h != NULL 2797 1.1.1.11 christos && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak 2798 1.1.1.11 christos && !h->root.linker_def 2799 1.1.1.11 christos && (bfd_link_executable (info) 2800 1.1.1.11 christos || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT) 2801 1.1.1.11 christos && r_type == R_390_PC32DBL 2802 1.1.1.11 christos && rel->r_offset >= 2) 2803 1.1.1.11 christos { 2804 1.1.1.11 christos void *insn_start = contents + rel->r_offset - 2; 2805 1.1.1.11 christos uint16_t op = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, insn_start) & 0xff0f; 2806 1.1.1.11 christos uint8_t reg = bfd_get_8 (input_bfd, insn_start + 1) & 0xf0; 2807 1.1.1.11 christos 2808 1.1.1.11 christos /* NOTE: The order of the if's is important! */ 2809 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace load address relative long (larl) with load 2810 1.1.1.11 christos address (lay) */ 2811 1.1.1.11 christos if (op == 0xc000) 2812 1.1.1.11 christos { 2813 1.1.1.11 christos /* larl rX,<weak sym> -> lay rX,0(0) */ 2814 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xe300 | reg, insn_start); 2815 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x71, insn_start + 2); 2816 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_NONE); 2817 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_addend = 0; 2818 1.1.1.11 christos continue; 2819 1.1.1.11 christos } 2820 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace prefetch data relative long (pfdrl) with a NOP */ 2821 1.1.1.11 christos else if (op == 0xc602) 2822 1.1.1.11 christos { 2823 1.1.1.11 christos /* Emit a 6-byte NOP: jgnop . */ 2824 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xc004, insn_start); 2825 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x0, insn_start + 2); 2826 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_NONE); 2827 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_addend = 0; 2828 1.1.1.11 christos continue; 2829 1.1.1.11 christos } 2830 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace the following instructions with a trap: 2831 1.1.1.11 christos - branch relative and save long (brasl) 2832 1.1.1.11 christos - load (logical) relative long (lrl, lgrl, lgfrl, llgfrl) 2833 1.1.1.11 christos - load (logical) halfword relative long (lhrl, lghrl, llhrl, llghrl) 2834 1.1.1.11 christos - store relative long (strl, stgrl) 2835 1.1.1.11 christos - store halfword relative long (sthrl) 2836 1.1.1.11 christos - execute relative long (exrl) 2837 1.1.1.11 christos - compare (logical) relative long (crl, clrl, cgrl, clgrl, cgfrl, clgfrl) 2838 1.1.1.11 christos - compare (logical) halfword relative long (chrl, cghrl, clhrl, clghrl) */ 2839 1.1.1.11 christos else if (op == 0xc005 || (op & 0xff00) == 0xc400 2840 1.1.1.11 christos || (op & 0xff00) == 0xc600) 2841 1.1.1.11 christos { 2842 1.1.1.11 christos /* Emit a 6-byte trap: jg .+2 */ 2843 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xc0f4, insn_start); 2844 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x1, insn_start + 2); 2845 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_NONE); 2846 1.1.1.12 christos rel->r_addend = 0; 2847 1.1.1.11 christos continue; 2848 1.1.1.11 christos } 2849 1.1.1.11 christos } 2850 1.1.1.6 christos /* Fall through. */ 2851 1.1.1.4 christos 2852 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_8: 2853 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_16: 2854 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_32: 2855 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_64: 2856 1.1.1.3 christos 2857 1.1.1.7 christos if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0) 2858 1.1.1.7 christos break; 2859 1.1.1.7 christos 2860 1.1.1.3 christos if (h != NULL 2861 1.1.1.3 christos && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) 2862 1.1.1.3 christos && h->def_regular) 2863 1.1.1.3 christos { 2864 1.1.1.6 christos if (!bfd_link_pic (info)) 2865 1.1.1.3 christos { 2866 1.1.1.6 christos /* For a non-shared object the symbol will not 2867 1.1.1.6 christos change. Hence we can write the address of the 2868 1.1.1.6 christos target IPLT slot now. */ 2869 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma 2870 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset 2871 1.1.1.3 christos + h ->plt.offset); 2872 1.1.1.3 christos goto do_relocation; 2873 1.1.1.3 christos } 2874 1.1.1.3 christos else 2875 1.1.1.3 christos { 2876 1.1.1.3 christos /* For shared objects a runtime relocation is needed. */ 2877 1.1.1.3 christos 2878 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela outrel; 2879 1.1.1.3 christos asection *sreloc; 2880 1.1.1.3 christos 2881 1.1.1.3 christos /* Need a dynamic relocation to get the real function 2882 1.1.1.3 christos address. */ 2883 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, 2884 1.1.1.3 christos info, 2885 1.1.1.3 christos input_section, 2886 1.1.1.3 christos rel->r_offset); 2887 1.1.1.3 christos if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1 2888 1.1.1.3 christos || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2) 2889 1.1.1.3 christos abort (); 2890 1.1.1.3 christos 2891 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma 2892 1.1.1.3 christos + input_section->output_offset); 2893 1.1.1.3 christos 2894 1.1.1.3 christos if (h->dynindx == -1 2895 1.1.1.3 christos || h->forced_local 2896 1.1.1.4 christos || bfd_link_executable (info)) 2897 1.1.1.3 christos { 2898 1.1.1.3 christos /* This symbol is resolved locally. */ 2899 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE); 2900 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value 2901 1.1.1.3 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma 2902 1.1.1.3 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset); 2903 1.1.1.3 christos } 2904 1.1.1.3 christos else 2905 1.1.1.3 christos { 2906 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type); 2907 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_addend = 0; 2908 1.1.1.3 christos } 2909 1.1.1.3 christos 2910 1.1.1.3 christos sreloc = htab->elf.irelifunc; 2911 1.1.1.12 christos _bfd_elf_append_rela (output_bfd, sreloc, &outrel); 2912 1.1.1.3 christos 2913 1.1.1.3 christos /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we 2914 1.1.1.3 christos do not want to fiddle with the addend. Otherwise, 2915 1.1.1.3 christos we need to include the symbol value so that it 2916 1.1.1.3 christos becomes an addend for the dynamic reloc. For an 2917 1.1.1.3 christos internal symbol, we have updated addend. */ 2918 1.1.1.3 christos continue; 2919 1.1.1.3 christos } 2920 1.1.1.3 christos } 2921 1.1.1.3 christos 2922 1.1.1.4 christos if ((bfd_link_pic (info) 2923 1.1 skrll && (h == NULL 2924 1.1.1.6 christos || (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) == STV_DEFAULT 2925 1.1.1.6 christos && !resolved_to_zero) 2926 1.1 skrll || h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak) 2927 1.1 skrll && ((r_type != R_390_PC16 2928 1.1.1.4 christos && r_type != R_390_PC12DBL 2929 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC16DBL 2930 1.1.1.4 christos && r_type != R_390_PC24DBL 2931 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC32 2932 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC32DBL 2933 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC64) 2934 1.1.1.2 christos || !SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))) 2935 1.1 skrll || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 2936 1.1.1.4 christos && !bfd_link_pic (info) 2937 1.1 skrll && h != NULL 2938 1.1 skrll && h->dynindx != -1 2939 1.1 skrll && !h->non_got_ref 2940 1.1 skrll && ((h->def_dynamic 2941 1.1 skrll && !h->def_regular) 2942 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak 2943 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined))) 2944 1.1 skrll { 2945 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel; 2946 1.1.1.9 christos bool skip, relocate; 2947 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc; 2948 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 2949 1.1 skrll 2950 1.1 skrll /* When generating a shared object, these relocations 2951 1.1 skrll are copied into the output file to be resolved at run 2952 1.1 skrll time. */ 2953 1.1.1.9 christos skip = false; 2954 1.1.1.9 christos relocate = false; 2955 1.1 skrll 2956 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset = 2957 1.1 skrll _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section, 2958 1.1 skrll rel->r_offset); 2959 1.1 skrll if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1) 2960 1.1.1.9 christos skip = true; 2961 1.1 skrll else if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2) 2962 1.1.1.9 christos skip = true, relocate = true; 2963 1.1 skrll 2964 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma 2965 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset); 2966 1.1 skrll 2967 1.1 skrll if (skip) 2968 1.1 skrll memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof outrel); 2969 1.1 skrll else if (h != NULL 2970 1.1 skrll && h->dynindx != -1 2971 1.1 skrll && (r_type == R_390_PC16 2972 1.1.1.4 christos || r_type == R_390_PC12DBL 2973 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC16DBL 2974 1.1.1.4 christos || r_type == R_390_PC24DBL 2975 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC32 2976 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC32DBL 2977 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC64 2978 1.1.1.12 christos || !(bfd_link_executable (info) || SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)) 2979 1.1 skrll || !h->def_regular)) 2980 1.1 skrll { 2981 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type); 2982 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = rel->r_addend; 2983 1.1 skrll } 2984 1.1 skrll else 2985 1.1 skrll { 2986 1.1 skrll /* This symbol is local, or marked to become local. */ 2987 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation + rel->r_addend; 2988 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_64) 2989 1.1 skrll { 2990 1.1.1.9 christos relocate = true; 2991 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE); 2992 1.1 skrll } 2993 1.1 skrll else 2994 1.1 skrll { 2995 1.1 skrll long sindx; 2996 1.1 skrll 2997 1.1 skrll if (bfd_is_abs_section (sec)) 2998 1.1 skrll sindx = 0; 2999 1.1 skrll else if (sec == NULL || sec->owner == NULL) 3000 1.1 skrll { 3001 1.1 skrll bfd_set_error(bfd_error_bad_value); 3002 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3003 1.1 skrll } 3004 1.1 skrll else 3005 1.1 skrll { 3006 1.1 skrll asection *osec; 3007 1.1 skrll 3008 1.1 skrll osec = sec->output_section; 3009 1.1 skrll sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx; 3010 1.1 skrll 3011 1.1 skrll if (sindx == 0) 3012 1.1 skrll { 3013 1.1 skrll osec = htab->elf.text_index_section; 3014 1.1 skrll sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx; 3015 1.1 skrll } 3016 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (sindx != 0); 3017 1.1 skrll 3018 1.1 skrll /* We are turning this relocation into one 3019 1.1 skrll against a section symbol, so subtract out 3020 1.1 skrll the output section's address but not the 3021 1.1 skrll offset of the input section in the output 3022 1.1 skrll section. */ 3023 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma; 3024 1.1 skrll } 3025 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (sindx, r_type); 3026 1.1 skrll } 3027 1.1 skrll } 3028 1.1 skrll 3029 1.1 skrll sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc; 3030 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL) 3031 1.1 skrll abort (); 3032 1.1 skrll 3033 1.1 skrll loc = sreloc->contents; 3034 1.1 skrll loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3035 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc); 3036 1.1 skrll 3037 1.1 skrll /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we do 3038 1.1 skrll not want to fiddle with the addend. Otherwise, we 3039 1.1 skrll need to include the symbol value so that it becomes 3040 1.1 skrll an addend for the dynamic reloc. */ 3041 1.1 skrll if (! relocate) 3042 1.1 skrll continue; 3043 1.1 skrll } 3044 1.1 skrll 3045 1.1 skrll break; 3046 1.1 skrll 3047 1.1 skrll /* Relocations for tls literal pool entries. */ 3048 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64: 3049 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info)) 3050 1.1 skrll { 3051 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel; 3052 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc; 3053 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 3054 1.1 skrll 3055 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset 3056 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_section->vma 3057 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset; 3058 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE); 3059 1.1 skrll sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc; 3060 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL) 3061 1.1 skrll abort (); 3062 1.1 skrll loc = sreloc->contents; 3063 1.1 skrll loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3064 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc); 3065 1.1 skrll } 3066 1.1 skrll /* Fall through. */ 3067 1.1 skrll 3068 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64: 3069 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64: 3070 1.1 skrll r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info, r_type, h == NULL); 3071 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN; 3072 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets) 3073 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx]; 3074 1.1 skrll else if (h != NULL) 3075 1.1 skrll { 3076 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type; 3077 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && h->dynindx == -1 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE) 3078 1.1 skrll r_type = R_390_TLS_LE64; 3079 1.1 skrll } 3080 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE) 3081 1.1 skrll r_type = R_390_TLS_IE64; 3082 1.1 skrll 3083 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64) 3084 1.1 skrll { 3085 1.1 skrll /* This relocation gets optimized away by the local exec 3086 1.1 skrll access optimization. */ 3087 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc); 3088 1.1.1.10 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation) + rel->r_addend, 3089 1.1 skrll contents + rel->r_offset); 3090 1.1 skrll continue; 3091 1.1 skrll } 3092 1.1 skrll 3093 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL) 3094 1.1 skrll abort (); 3095 1.1 skrll 3096 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 3097 1.1 skrll off = h->got.offset; 3098 1.1 skrll else 3099 1.1 skrll { 3100 1.1 skrll if (local_got_offsets == NULL) 3101 1.1 skrll abort (); 3102 1.1 skrll 3103 1.1 skrll off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx]; 3104 1.1 skrll } 3105 1.1 skrll 3106 1.1 skrll emit_tls_relocs: 3107 1.1 skrll 3108 1.1 skrll if ((off & 1) != 0) 3109 1.1 skrll off &= ~1; 3110 1.1 skrll else 3111 1.1 skrll { 3112 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel; 3113 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 3114 1.1 skrll int dr_type, indx; 3115 1.1 skrll 3116 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL) 3117 1.1 skrll abort (); 3118 1.1 skrll 3119 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma 3120 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off); 3121 1.1 skrll 3122 1.1 skrll indx = h && h->dynindx != -1 ? h->dynindx : 0; 3123 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64) 3124 1.1 skrll dr_type = R_390_TLS_DTPMOD; 3125 1.1 skrll else 3126 1.1 skrll dr_type = R_390_TLS_TPOFF; 3127 1.1 skrll if (dr_type == R_390_TLS_TPOFF && indx == 0) 3128 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info); 3129 1.1 skrll else 3130 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0; 3131 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, dr_type); 3132 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents; 3133 1.1.1.3 christos loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++ 3134 1.1 skrll * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3135 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc); 3136 1.1 skrll 3137 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64) 3138 1.1 skrll { 3139 1.1 skrll if (indx == 0) 3140 1.1 skrll { 3141 1.1.1.6 christos BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc); 3142 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 3143 1.1 skrll relocation - dtpoff_base (info), 3144 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE); 3145 1.1 skrll } 3146 1.1 skrll else 3147 1.1 skrll { 3148 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_DTPOFF); 3149 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 3150 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0; 3151 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++; 3152 1.1 skrll loc += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3153 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc); 3154 1.1 skrll } 3155 1.1 skrll } 3156 1.1 skrll 3157 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 3158 1.1 skrll h->got.offset |= 1; 3159 1.1 skrll else 3160 1.1 skrll local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1; 3161 1.1 skrll } 3162 1.1 skrll 3163 1.1 skrll if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2) 3164 1.1 skrll abort (); 3165 1.1 skrll if (r_type == ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info)) 3166 1.1 skrll { 3167 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off; 3168 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IE64 || r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT) 3169 1.1.1.3 christos relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma; 3170 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 3171 1.1 skrll } 3172 1.1 skrll else 3173 1.1 skrll { 3174 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off, 3175 1.1 skrll contents + rel->r_offset); 3176 1.1 skrll continue; 3177 1.1 skrll } 3178 1.1 skrll break; 3179 1.1 skrll 3180 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12: 3181 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20: 3182 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT: 3183 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL) 3184 1.1 skrll { 3185 1.1 skrll if (local_got_offsets == NULL) 3186 1.1 skrll abort(); 3187 1.1 skrll off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx]; 3188 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info)) 3189 1.1 skrll goto emit_tls_relocs; 3190 1.1 skrll } 3191 1.1 skrll else 3192 1.1 skrll { 3193 1.1 skrll off = h->got.offset; 3194 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type; 3195 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info) || h->dynindx != -1 || tls_type < GOT_TLS_IE) 3196 1.1 skrll goto emit_tls_relocs; 3197 1.1 skrll } 3198 1.1 skrll 3199 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL) 3200 1.1 skrll abort (); 3201 1.1 skrll 3202 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc); 3203 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation), 3204 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off); 3205 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off; 3206 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT) 3207 1.1.1.3 christos relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma; 3208 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 3209 1.1 skrll break; 3210 1.1 skrll 3211 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64: 3212 1.1.1.9 christos if (! bfd_link_dll (info)) 3213 1.1 skrll /* The literal pool entry this relocation refers to gets ignored 3214 1.1 skrll by the optimized code of the local exec model. Do nothing 3215 1.1 skrll and the value will turn out zero. */ 3216 1.1 skrll continue; 3217 1.1 skrll 3218 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL) 3219 1.1 skrll abort (); 3220 1.1 skrll 3221 1.1 skrll off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset; 3222 1.1 skrll if (off & 1) 3223 1.1 skrll off &= ~1; 3224 1.1 skrll else 3225 1.1 skrll { 3226 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel; 3227 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 3228 1.1 skrll 3229 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL) 3230 1.1 skrll abort (); 3231 1.1 skrll 3232 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma 3233 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off); 3234 1.1 skrll 3235 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 0, 3236 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE); 3237 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_TLS_DTPMOD); 3238 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0; 3239 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents; 3240 1.1.1.3 christos loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++ 3241 1.1 skrll * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3242 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc); 3243 1.1 skrll htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1; 3244 1.1 skrll } 3245 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off; 3246 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false; 3247 1.1 skrll break; 3248 1.1 skrll 3249 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LE64: 3250 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info)) 3251 1.1 skrll { 3252 1.1 skrll /* Linking a shared library with non-fpic code requires 3253 1.1 skrll a R_390_TLS_TPOFF relocation. */ 3254 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel; 3255 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc; 3256 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 3257 1.1 skrll int indx; 3258 1.1 skrll 3259 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset 3260 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_section->vma 3261 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset; 3262 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL && h->dynindx != -1) 3263 1.1 skrll indx = h->dynindx; 3264 1.1 skrll else 3265 1.1 skrll indx = 0; 3266 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_TPOFF); 3267 1.1 skrll if (indx == 0) 3268 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info); 3269 1.1 skrll else 3270 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0; 3271 1.1 skrll sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc; 3272 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL) 3273 1.1 skrll abort (); 3274 1.1 skrll loc = sreloc->contents; 3275 1.1 skrll loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3276 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc); 3277 1.1 skrll } 3278 1.1 skrll else 3279 1.1 skrll { 3280 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc); 3281 1.1.1.10 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation) + rel->r_addend, 3282 1.1 skrll contents + rel->r_offset); 3283 1.1 skrll } 3284 1.1 skrll continue; 3285 1.1 skrll 3286 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDO64: 3287 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info) || (input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING)) 3288 1.1 skrll relocation -= dtpoff_base (info); 3289 1.1 skrll else 3290 1.1 skrll /* When converting LDO to LE, we must negate. */ 3291 1.1 skrll relocation = -tpoff (info, relocation); 3292 1.1 skrll break; 3293 1.1 skrll 3294 1.1 skrll /* Relocations for tls instructions. */ 3295 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LOAD: 3296 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GDCALL: 3297 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDCALL: 3298 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN; 3299 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets) 3300 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx]; 3301 1.1 skrll else if (h != NULL) 3302 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type; 3303 1.1 skrll 3304 1.1 skrll if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD) 3305 1.1 skrll continue; 3306 1.1 skrll 3307 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LOAD) 3308 1.1 skrll { 3309 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1)) 3310 1.1 skrll { 3311 1.1 skrll /* IE->LE transition. Four valid cases: 3312 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(0,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 3313 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(%ry,0) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 3314 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 3315 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */ 3316 1.1 skrll unsigned int insn0, insn1, ry; 3317 1.1 skrll 3318 1.1 skrll insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset); 3319 1.1 skrll insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4); 3320 1.1 skrll if (insn1 != 0x0004) 3321 1.1.1.6 christos { 3322 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel); 3323 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3324 1.1.1.6 christos } 3325 1.1 skrll if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe3000000) 3326 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(%ry,0) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */ 3327 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000); 3328 1.1 skrll else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe3000000) 3329 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(0,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */ 3330 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4; 3331 1.1 skrll else if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000) 3332 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */ 3333 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000); 3334 1.1 skrll else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe30c0000) 3335 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */ 3336 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4; 3337 1.1 skrll else 3338 1.1.1.6 christos { 3339 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel); 3340 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3341 1.1.1.6 christos } 3342 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xeb000000 | (insn0 & 0x00f00000) | ry; 3343 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x000d; 3344 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset); 3345 1.1 skrll bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4); 3346 1.1 skrll } 3347 1.1 skrll } 3348 1.1 skrll else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GDCALL) 3349 1.1 skrll { 3350 1.1 skrll unsigned int insn0, insn1; 3351 1.1 skrll 3352 1.1 skrll insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset); 3353 1.1 skrll insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4); 3354 1.1 skrll if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000) 3355 1.1.1.6 christos { 3356 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel); 3357 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3358 1.1.1.6 christos } 3359 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1)) 3360 1.1 skrll { 3361 1.1 skrll /* GD->LE transition. 3362 1.1 skrll brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */ 3363 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xc0040000; 3364 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x0000; 3365 1.1 skrll } 3366 1.1 skrll else 3367 1.1 skrll { 3368 1.1 skrll /* GD->IE transition. 3369 1.1 skrll brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> lg %r2,0(%r2,%r12) */ 3370 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xe322c000; 3371 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x0004; 3372 1.1 skrll } 3373 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset); 3374 1.1 skrll bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4); 3375 1.1 skrll } 3376 1.1 skrll else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LDCALL) 3377 1.1 skrll { 3378 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info)) 3379 1.1 skrll { 3380 1.1 skrll unsigned int insn0, insn1; 3381 1.1 skrll 3382 1.1 skrll insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset); 3383 1.1 skrll insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4); 3384 1.1 skrll if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000) 3385 1.1.1.6 christos { 3386 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel); 3387 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3388 1.1.1.6 christos } 3389 1.1 skrll /* LD->LE transition. 3390 1.1 skrll brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */ 3391 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xc0040000; 3392 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x0000; 3393 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset); 3394 1.1 skrll bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4); 3395 1.1 skrll } 3396 1.1 skrll } 3397 1.1 skrll continue; 3398 1.1 skrll 3399 1.1 skrll default: 3400 1.1 skrll break; 3401 1.1 skrll } 3402 1.1 skrll 3403 1.1 skrll /* Dynamic relocs are not propagated for SEC_DEBUGGING sections 3404 1.1 skrll because such sections are not SEC_ALLOC and thus ld.so will 3405 1.1 skrll not process them. */ 3406 1.1 skrll if (unresolved_reloc 3407 1.1 skrll && !((input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING) != 0 3408 1.1.1.3 christos && h->def_dynamic) 3409 1.1.1.3 christos && _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section, 3410 1.1.1.3 christos rel->r_offset) != (bfd_vma) -1) 3411 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler 3412 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 3413 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): " 3414 1.1.1.7 christos "unresolvable %s relocation against symbol `%s'"), 3415 1.1 skrll input_bfd, 3416 1.1 skrll input_section, 3417 1.1.1.7 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset, 3418 1.1 skrll howto->name, 3419 1.1 skrll h->root.root.string); 3420 1.1 skrll 3421 1.1.1.3 christos do_relocation: 3422 1.1.1.3 christos 3423 1.1.1.4 christos /* When applying a 24 bit reloc we need to start one byte 3424 1.1.1.4 christos earlier. Otherwise the 32 bit get/put bfd operations might 3425 1.1.1.4 christos access a byte after the actual section. */ 3426 1.1.1.4 christos if (r_type == R_390_PC24DBL 3427 1.1.1.4 christos || r_type == R_390_PLT24DBL) 3428 1.1.1.4 christos rel->r_offset--; 3429 1.1.1.4 christos 3430 1.1.1.10 christos /* Issue an error if the right shift implied by the relocation 3431 1.1.1.10 christos would drop bits from the symbol value. */ 3432 1.1.1.10 christos if (howto->rightshift 3433 1.1.1.10 christos && (relocation & (((bfd_vma)1 << howto->rightshift) - 1))) 3434 1.1.1.10 christos { 3435 1.1.1.10 christos _bfd_error_handler 3436 1.1.1.10 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 3437 1.1.1.10 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): " 3438 1.1.1.11 christos "relocation %s against misaligned symbol `%s' (%#" PRIx64 ") in %pB"), 3439 1.1.1.10 christos input_bfd, 3440 1.1.1.10 christos input_section, 3441 1.1.1.10 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset, 3442 1.1.1.11 christos howto->name, 3443 1.1.1.10 christos h->root.root.string, 3444 1.1.1.10 christos (uint64_t)relocation, 3445 1.1.1.11 christos sec->owner); 3446 1.1.1.10 christos return false; 3447 1.1.1.10 christos } 3448 1.1.1.10 christos 3449 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_20 3450 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_GOT20 3451 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_GOTPLT20 3452 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_TLS_GOTIE20) 3453 1.1 skrll { 3454 1.1 skrll relocation += rel->r_addend; 3455 1.1 skrll relocation = (relocation&0xfff) << 8 | (relocation&0xff000) >> 12; 3456 1.1 skrll r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section, 3457 1.1 skrll contents, rel->r_offset, 3458 1.1 skrll relocation, 0); 3459 1.1 skrll } 3460 1.1 skrll else 3461 1.1 skrll r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section, 3462 1.1 skrll contents, rel->r_offset, 3463 1.1 skrll relocation, rel->r_addend); 3464 1.1 skrll 3465 1.1 skrll if (r != bfd_reloc_ok) 3466 1.1 skrll { 3467 1.1 skrll const char *name; 3468 1.1 skrll 3469 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL) 3470 1.1 skrll name = h->root.root.string; 3471 1.1 skrll else 3472 1.1 skrll { 3473 1.1 skrll name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd, 3474 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr->sh_link, 3475 1.1 skrll sym->st_name); 3476 1.1 skrll if (name == NULL) 3477 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3478 1.1 skrll if (*name == '\0') 3479 1.1.1.8 christos name = bfd_section_name (sec); 3480 1.1 skrll } 3481 1.1 skrll 3482 1.1 skrll if (r == bfd_reloc_overflow) 3483 1.1.1.5 christos (*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow) 3484 1.1.1.5 christos (info, (h ? &h->root : NULL), name, howto->name, 3485 1.1.1.5 christos (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rel->r_offset); 3486 1.1 skrll else 3487 1.1 skrll { 3488 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler 3489 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */ 3490 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): reloc against `%s': error %d"), 3491 1.1 skrll input_bfd, input_section, 3492 1.1.1.7 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset, name, (int) r); 3493 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3494 1.1 skrll } 3495 1.1 skrll } 3496 1.1 skrll } 3497 1.1 skrll 3498 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 3499 1.1 skrll } 3500 1.1 skrll 3501 1.1.1.3 christos /* Generate the PLT slots together with the dynamic relocations needed 3502 1.1.1.3 christos for IFUNC symbols. */ 3503 1.1.1.3 christos 3504 1.1.1.3 christos static void 3505 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (bfd *output_bfd, 3506 1.1.1.3 christos struct bfd_link_info *info, 3507 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *h, 3508 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab, 3509 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma plt_offset, 3510 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma resolver_address) 3511 1.1.1.3 christos { 3512 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma plt_index; 3513 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma got_offset; 3514 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela rela; 3515 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_byte *loc; 3516 1.1.1.3 christos asection *plt, *gotplt, *relplt; 3517 1.1.1.3 christos 3518 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.iplt == NULL 3519 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.igotplt == NULL 3520 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.irelplt == NULL) 3521 1.1.1.3 christos abort (); 3522 1.1.1.3 christos 3523 1.1.1.3 christos /* Index of the PLT slot within iplt section. */ 3524 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index = plt_offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE; 3525 1.1.1.3 christos plt = htab->elf.iplt; 3526 1.1.1.3 christos /* Offset into the igot.plt section. */ 3527 1.1.1.3 christos got_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 3528 1.1.1.3 christos gotplt = htab->elf.igotplt; 3529 1.1.1.3 christos relplt = htab->elf.irelplt; 3530 1.1.1.3 christos 3531 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT. */ 3532 1.1.1.3 christos memcpy (plt->contents + plt_offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry, 3533 1.1.1.3 christos PLT_ENTRY_SIZE); 3534 1.1.1.3 christos 3535 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup the relative address to the GOT entry */ 3536 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 3537 1.1.1.3 christos (gotplt->output_section->vma + 3538 1.1.1.3 christos gotplt->output_offset + got_offset 3539 1.1.1.3 christos - (plt->output_section->vma + 3540 1.1.1.3 christos plt->output_offset + 3541 1.1.1.3 christos plt_offset))/2, 3542 1.1.1.3 christos plt->contents + plt_offset + 2); 3543 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */ 3544 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (plt->output_offset + 3545 1.1.1.3 christos (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2, 3546 1.1.1.3 christos plt->contents + plt_offset + 24); 3547 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section. */ 3548 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relplt->output_offset + 3549 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela), 3550 1.1.1.3 christos plt->contents + plt_offset + 28); 3551 1.1.1.3 christos 3552 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table. 3553 1.1.1.3 christos Points to instruction after GOT offset. */ 3554 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 3555 1.1.1.3 christos (plt->output_section->vma 3556 1.1.1.3 christos + plt->output_offset 3557 1.1.1.3 christos + plt_offset 3558 1.1.1.3 christos + 14), 3559 1.1.1.3 christos gotplt->contents + got_offset); 3560 1.1.1.3 christos 3561 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section. */ 3562 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_offset = (gotplt->output_section->vma 3563 1.1.1.3 christos + gotplt->output_offset 3564 1.1.1.3 christos + got_offset); 3565 1.1.1.3 christos 3566 1.1.1.3 christos if (!h 3567 1.1.1.3 christos || h->dynindx == -1 3568 1.1.1.4 christos || ((bfd_link_executable (info) 3569 1.1.1.3 christos || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT) 3570 1.1.1.3 christos && h->def_regular)) 3571 1.1.1.3 christos { 3572 1.1.1.3 christos /* The symbol can be locally resolved. */ 3573 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE); 3574 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_addend = resolver_address; 3575 1.1.1.3 christos } 3576 1.1.1.3 christos else 3577 1.1.1.3 christos { 3578 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT); 3579 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_addend = 0; 3580 1.1.1.3 christos } 3581 1.1.1.3 christos 3582 1.1.1.3 christos loc = relplt->contents + plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3583 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc); 3584 1.1.1.3 christos } 3585 1.1.1.3 christos 3586 1.1.1.3 christos 3587 1.1 skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling. We set the contents of various 3588 1.1 skrll dynamic sections here. */ 3589 1.1 skrll 3590 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 3591 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd, 3592 1.1.1.2 christos struct bfd_link_info *info, 3593 1.1.1.2 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *h, 3594 1.1.1.2 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *sym) 3595 1.1 skrll { 3596 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 3597 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry*)h; 3598 1.1 skrll 3599 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 3600 1.1 skrll 3601 1.1 skrll if (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1) 3602 1.1 skrll { 3603 1.1 skrll bfd_vma plt_index; 3604 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_vma gotplt_offset; 3605 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela rela; 3606 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 3607 1.1 skrll 3608 1.1 skrll /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table. Set 3609 1.1 skrll it up. */ 3610 1.1.1.4 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular) 3611 1.1.1.3 christos { 3612 1.1.1.4 christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, h, 3613 1.1.1.4 christos htab, h->plt.offset, 3614 1.1.1.4 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_address + 3615 1.1.1.4 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_offset + 3616 1.1.1.4 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_section->vma); 3617 1.1.1.4 christos 3618 1.1.1.4 christos /* Do not return yet. Handling of explicit GOT slots of 3619 1.1.1.4 christos IFUNC symbols is below. */ 3620 1.1.1.3 christos } 3621 1.1.1.3 christos else 3622 1.1.1.3 christos { 3623 1.1.1.3 christos if (h->dynindx == -1 3624 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.splt == NULL 3625 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.sgotplt == NULL 3626 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.srelplt == NULL) 3627 1.1.1.3 christos abort (); 3628 1.1 skrll 3629 1.1.1.3 christos /* Calc. index no. 3630 1.1.1.3 christos Current offset - size first entry / entry size. */ 3631 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index = (h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE; 3632 1.1.1.3 christos 3633 1.1.1.8 christos /* The slots in the .got.plt correspond to the PLT slots in 3634 1.1.1.8 christos the same order. */ 3635 1.1.1.8 christos gotplt_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 3636 1.1.1.8 christos 3637 1.1.1.8 christos /* If .got.plt comes first it needs to contain the 3 header 3638 1.1.1.8 christos entries. */ 3639 1.1.1.8 christos if (!s390_gotplt_after_got_p (info)) 3640 1.1.1.8 christos gotplt_offset += 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE; 3641 1.1.1.3 christos 3642 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT. */ 3643 1.1.1.3 christos memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry, 3644 1.1.1.3 christos PLT_ENTRY_SIZE); 3645 1.1 skrll 3646 1.1.1.8 christos /* The first instruction in the PLT entry is a LARL loading 3647 1.1.1.8 christos the address of the GOT slot. We write the 4 byte 3648 1.1.1.8 christos immediate operand of the LARL instruction here. */ 3649 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 3650 1.1.1.3 christos (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma + 3651 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset + gotplt_offset 3652 1.1.1.3 christos - (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma + 3653 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->output_offset + 3654 1.1.1.3 christos h->plt.offset))/2, 3655 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 2); 3656 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */ 3657 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE + 3658 1.1.1.3 christos (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2, 3659 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 24); 3660 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section. */ 3661 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela), 3662 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 28); 3663 1.1 skrll 3664 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table. 3665 1.1.1.3 christos Points to instruction after GOT offset. */ 3666 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 3667 1.1.1.3 christos (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma 3668 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.splt->output_offset 3669 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset 3670 1.1.1.3 christos + 14), 3671 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + gotplt_offset); 3672 1.1.1.3 christos 3673 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section. */ 3674 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma 3675 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset 3676 1.1.1.8 christos + gotplt_offset); 3677 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT); 3678 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_addend = 0; 3679 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelplt->contents + plt_index * 3680 1.1.1.3 christos sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3681 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc); 3682 1.1.1.3 christos 3683 1.1.1.3 christos if (!h->def_regular) 3684 1.1.1.3 christos { 3685 1.1.1.3 christos /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in 3686 1.1.1.3 christos the .plt section. Leave the value alone. This is a clue 3687 1.1.1.3 christos for the dynamic linker, to make function pointer 3688 1.1.1.3 christos comparisons work between an application and shared 3689 1.1.1.3 christos library. */ 3690 1.1.1.3 christos sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF; 3691 1.1.1.3 christos } 3692 1.1 skrll } 3693 1.1 skrll } 3694 1.1 skrll 3695 1.1 skrll if (h->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1 3696 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_GD 3697 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE 3698 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE_NLT) 3699 1.1 skrll { 3700 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela rela; 3701 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 3702 1.1 skrll 3703 1.1 skrll /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table. Set it 3704 1.1 skrll up. */ 3705 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL || htab->elf.srelgot == NULL) 3706 1.1 skrll abort (); 3707 1.1 skrll 3708 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma 3709 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset 3710 1.1 skrll + (h->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1)); 3711 1.1 skrll 3712 1.1.1.3 christos if (h->def_regular && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)) 3713 1.1.1.3 christos { 3714 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info)) 3715 1.1.1.3 christos { 3716 1.1.1.3 christos /* An explicit GOT slot usage needs GLOB_DAT. If the 3717 1.1.1.3 christos symbol references local the implicit got.iplt slot 3718 1.1.1.3 christos will be used and the IRELATIVE reloc has been created 3719 1.1.1.3 christos above. */ 3720 1.1.1.3 christos goto do_glob_dat; 3721 1.1.1.3 christos } 3722 1.1.1.3 christos else 3723 1.1.1.3 christos { 3724 1.1.1.3 christos /* For non-shared objects explicit GOT slots must be 3725 1.1.1.3 christos filled with the PLT slot address for pointer 3726 1.1.1.3 christos equality reasons. */ 3727 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma 3728 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset 3729 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset), 3730 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset); 3731 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 3732 1.1.1.3 christos } 3733 1.1.1.3 christos } 3734 1.1.1.11 christos else if (SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h)) 3735 1.1 skrll { 3736 1.1.1.6 christos if (UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h)) 3737 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 3738 1.1.1.6 christos 3739 1.1.1.3 christos /* If this is a static link, or it is a -Bsymbolic link and 3740 1.1.1.3 christos the symbol is defined locally or was forced to be local 3741 1.1.1.3 christos because of a version file, we just want to emit a 3742 1.1.1.3 christos RELATIVE reloc. The entry in the global offset table 3743 1.1.1.3 christos will already have been initialized in the 3744 1.1.1.3 christos relocate_section function. */ 3745 1.1.1.6 christos if (!(h->def_regular || ELF_COMMON_DEF_P (h))) 3746 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3747 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) != 0); 3748 1.1 skrll rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE); 3749 1.1 skrll rela.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value 3750 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma 3751 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset); 3752 1.1 skrll } 3753 1.1 skrll else 3754 1.1 skrll { 3755 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) == 0); 3756 1.1.1.6 christos do_glob_dat: 3757 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset); 3758 1.1 skrll rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_GLOB_DAT); 3759 1.1 skrll rela.r_addend = 0; 3760 1.1 skrll } 3761 1.1 skrll 3762 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents; 3763 1.1.1.3 christos loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3764 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc); 3765 1.1 skrll } 3766 1.1 skrll 3767 1.1 skrll if (h->needs_copy) 3768 1.1 skrll { 3769 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela rela; 3770 1.1.1.6 christos asection *s; 3771 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc; 3772 1.1 skrll 3773 1.1 skrll /* This symbols needs a copy reloc. Set it up. */ 3774 1.1 skrll 3775 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1 3776 1.1 skrll || (h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined 3777 1.1 skrll && h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak) 3778 1.1.1.12 christos || htab->elf.srelbss == NULL 3779 1.1.1.12 christos || htab->elf.sreldynrelro == NULL) 3780 1.1 skrll abort (); 3781 1.1 skrll 3782 1.1 skrll rela.r_offset = (h->root.u.def.value 3783 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma 3784 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset); 3785 1.1 skrll rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_COPY); 3786 1.1 skrll rela.r_addend = 0; 3787 1.1.1.6 christos if (h->root.u.def.section == htab->elf.sdynrelro) 3788 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.sreldynrelro; 3789 1.1.1.6 christos else 3790 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.srelbss; 3791 1.1.1.6 christos loc = s->contents + s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela); 3792 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc); 3793 1.1 skrll } 3794 1.1 skrll 3795 1.1 skrll /* Mark some specially defined symbols as absolute. */ 3796 1.1.1.4 christos if (h == htab->elf.hdynamic 3797 1.1 skrll || h == htab->elf.hgot 3798 1.1 skrll || h == htab->elf.hplt) 3799 1.1 skrll sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS; 3800 1.1 skrll 3801 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 3802 1.1 skrll } 3803 1.1 skrll 3804 1.1 skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the 3805 1.1 skrll dynamic linker, before writing them out. */ 3806 1.1 skrll 3807 1.1 skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class 3808 1.1.1.4 christos elf_s390_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 3809 1.1.1.4 christos const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 3810 1.1.1.4 christos const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela) 3811 1.1.1.4 christos { 3812 1.1.1.4 christos bfd *abfd = info->output_bfd; 3813 1.1.1.12 christos elf_backend_data *bed = get_elf_backend_data (abfd); 3814 1.1.1.4 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 3815 1.1.1.4 christos unsigned long r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rela->r_info); 3816 1.1.1.4 christos Elf_Internal_Sym sym; 3817 1.1.1.4 christos 3818 1.1.1.4 christos if (htab->elf.dynsym == NULL 3819 1.1.1.4 christos || !bed->s->swap_symbol_in (abfd, 3820 1.1.1.4 christos (htab->elf.dynsym->contents 3821 1.1.1.4 christos + r_symndx * bed->s->sizeof_sym), 3822 1.1.1.4 christos 0, &sym)) 3823 1.1.1.4 christos abort (); 3824 1.1.1.4 christos 3825 1.1.1.4 christos /* Check relocation against STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol. */ 3826 1.1.1.4 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym.st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC) 3827 1.1.1.4 christos return reloc_class_ifunc; 3828 1.1.1.4 christos 3829 1.1 skrll switch ((int) ELF64_R_TYPE (rela->r_info)) 3830 1.1 skrll { 3831 1.1 skrll case R_390_RELATIVE: 3832 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_relative; 3833 1.1 skrll case R_390_JMP_SLOT: 3834 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_plt; 3835 1.1 skrll case R_390_COPY: 3836 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_copy; 3837 1.1 skrll default: 3838 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_normal; 3839 1.1 skrll } 3840 1.1 skrll } 3841 1.1 skrll 3842 1.1 skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections. */ 3843 1.1 skrll 3844 1.1.1.9 christos static bool 3845 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd, 3846 1.1.1.12 christos struct bfd_link_info *info, 3847 1.1.1.12 christos bfd_byte *buf) 3848 1.1 skrll { 3849 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 3850 1.1 skrll bfd *dynobj; 3851 1.1 skrll asection *sdyn; 3852 1.1.1.3 christos bfd *ibfd; 3853 1.1.1.3 christos unsigned int i; 3854 1.1 skrll 3855 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 3856 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL) 3857 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3858 1.1.1.2 christos 3859 1.1 skrll dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj; 3860 1.1.1.3 christos sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic"); 3861 1.1 skrll 3862 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created) 3863 1.1 skrll { 3864 1.1 skrll Elf64_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend; 3865 1.1 skrll 3866 1.1.1.3 christos if (sdyn == NULL || htab->elf.sgot == NULL) 3867 1.1 skrll abort (); 3868 1.1 skrll 3869 1.1 skrll dyncon = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents; 3870 1.1 skrll dynconend = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size); 3871 1.1 skrll for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++) 3872 1.1 skrll { 3873 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn; 3874 1.1 skrll asection *s; 3875 1.1 skrll 3876 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn); 3877 1.1 skrll 3878 1.1 skrll switch (dyn.d_tag) 3879 1.1 skrll { 3880 1.1 skrll default: 3881 1.1 skrll continue; 3882 1.1 skrll 3883 1.1 skrll case DT_PLTGOT: 3884 1.1.1.8 christos /* DT_PLTGOT matches _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ */ 3885 1.1.1.8 christos dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s390_got_pointer (info); 3886 1.1 skrll break; 3887 1.1 skrll 3888 1.1 skrll case DT_JMPREL: 3889 1.1.1.5 christos s = htab->elf.srelplt; 3890 1.1.1.5 christos dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset; 3891 1.1 skrll break; 3892 1.1 skrll 3893 1.1 skrll case DT_PLTRELSZ: 3894 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val = htab->elf.srelplt->size; 3895 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab->elf.irelplt) 3896 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val += htab->elf.irelplt->size; 3897 1.1 skrll break; 3898 1.1 skrll 3899 1.1 skrll case DT_RELASZ: 3900 1.1 skrll /* The procedure linkage table relocs (DT_JMPREL) should 3901 1.1 skrll not be included in the overall relocs (DT_RELA). 3902 1.1 skrll Therefore, we override the DT_RELASZ entry here to 3903 1.1 skrll make it not include the JMPREL relocs. Since the 3904 1.1 skrll linker script arranges for .rela.plt to follow all 3905 1.1 skrll other relocation sections, we don't have to worry 3906 1.1 skrll about changing the DT_RELA entry. */ 3907 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.srelplt->size; 3908 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab->elf.irelplt) 3909 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.irelplt->size; 3910 1.1 skrll break; 3911 1.1 skrll } 3912 1.1 skrll 3913 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon); 3914 1.1 skrll } 3915 1.1 skrll 3916 1.1 skrll /* Fill in the special first entry in the procedure linkage table. */ 3917 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.splt && htab->elf.splt->size > 0) 3918 1.1 skrll { 3919 1.1 skrll /* fill in blueprint for plt 0 entry */ 3920 1.1.1.3 christos memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents, elf_s390x_first_plt_entry, 3921 1.1.1.3 christos PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE); 3922 1.1.1.8 christos /* The second instruction in the first PLT entry is a LARL 3923 1.1.1.8 christos loading the GOT pointer. Fill in the LARL immediate 3924 1.1.1.8 christos address. */ 3925 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 3926 1.1.1.8 christos (s390_got_pointer (info) 3927 1.1.1.5 christos - htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma 3928 1.1.1.5 christos - htab->elf.splt->output_offset - 6)/2, 3929 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + 8); 3930 1.1 skrll } 3931 1.1.1.4 christos if (elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section) != NULL) 3932 1.1.1.4 christos elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize 3933 1.1.1.4 christos = PLT_ENTRY_SIZE; 3934 1.1 skrll } 3935 1.1 skrll 3936 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.hgot && htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section) 3937 1.1 skrll { 3938 1.1 skrll /* Fill in the first three entries in the global offset table. */ 3939 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->size > 0) 3940 1.1 skrll { 3941 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 3942 1.1 skrll (sdyn == NULL ? (bfd_vma) 0 3943 1.1 skrll : sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset), 3944 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents); 3945 1.1 skrll /* One entry for shared object struct ptr. */ 3946 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, 3947 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents + 8); 3948 1.1 skrll /* One entry for _dl_runtime_resolve. */ 3949 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, 3950 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents + 16); 3951 1.1 skrll } 3952 1.1.1.9 christos if (htab->elf.sgot != NULL && htab->elf.sgot->size > 0) 3953 1.1.1.9 christos elf_section_data (htab->elf.sgot->output_section) 3954 1.1.1.9 christos ->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 8; 3955 1.1 skrll } 3956 1.1.1.3 christos 3957 1.1.1.3 christos /* Finish dynamic symbol for local IFUNC symbols. */ 3958 1.1.1.4 christos for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next) 3959 1.1.1.3 christos { 3960 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt; 3961 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *isym; 3962 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr; 3963 1.1.1.3 christos 3964 1.1.1.3 christos symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd); 3965 1.1.1.3 christos 3966 1.1.1.6 christos if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd)) 3967 1.1.1.6 christos continue; 3968 1.1.1.6 christos 3969 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd); 3970 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt != NULL) 3971 1.1.1.3 christos for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++) 3972 1.1.1.3 christos { 3973 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt[i].plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1) 3974 1.1.1.3 christos { 3975 1.1.1.3 christos asection *sec = local_plt[i].sec; 3976 1.1.1.9 christos isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache, ibfd, i); 3977 1.1.1.3 christos if (isym == NULL) 3978 1.1.1.9 christos return false; 3979 1.1.1.3 christos 3980 1.1.1.3 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC) 3981 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, NULL, htab, 3982 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[i].plt.offset, 3983 1.1.1.3 christos isym->st_value 3984 1.1.1.3 christos + sec->output_section->vma 3985 1.1.1.3 christos + sec->output_offset); 3986 1.1.1.3 christos 3987 1.1.1.3 christos } 3988 1.1.1.3 christos } 3989 1.1.1.3 christos } 3990 1.1.1.3 christos 3991 1.1.1.11 christos /* Adjust .eh_frame for .plt section. */ 3992 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame != NULL 3993 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_eh_frame->contents != NULL) 3994 1.1.1.11 christos { 3995 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->elf.splt != NULL 3996 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0 3997 1.1.1.11 christos && (htab->elf.splt->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) == 0 3998 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->output_section != NULL 3999 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_eh_frame->output_section != NULL) 4000 1.1.1.11 christos { 4001 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma plt_start = htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma; 4002 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma eh_frame_start = htab->plt_eh_frame->output_section->vma 4003 1.1.1.11 christos + htab->plt_eh_frame->output_offset 4004 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_FDE_START_OFFSET; 4005 1.1.1.11 christos /* Note: Linker may have discarded the FDE, so that store may 4006 1.1.1.11 christos be beyond current htab->plt_eh_frame->size. Can be ignored, 4007 1.1.1.11 christos as htab->plt_eh_frame->contents got allocated with 4008 1.1.1.11 christos sizeof (elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt). See PR 12570. */ 4009 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_signed_32 (dynobj, plt_start - eh_frame_start, 4010 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->contents 4011 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_FDE_START_OFFSET); 4012 1.1.1.11 christos } 4013 1.1.1.11 christos 4014 1.1.1.12 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame->sec_info_type == SEC_INFO_TYPE_EH_FRAME 4015 1.1.1.12 christos && !_bfd_elf_write_linker_section_eh_frame (output_bfd, info, 4016 1.1.1.12 christos htab->plt_eh_frame, buf)) 4017 1.1.1.12 christos return NULL; 4018 1.1.1.11 christos } 4019 1.1.1.11 christos 4020 1.1.1.11 christos /* Make any adjustment if necessary and merge .sframe section to 4021 1.1.1.11 christos create the final .sframe section for output_bfd. */ 4022 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe != NULL 4023 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_sframe->contents != NULL) 4024 1.1.1.11 christos { 4025 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->elf.splt != NULL 4026 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0 4027 1.1.1.11 christos && (htab->elf.splt->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) == 0 4028 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->output_section != NULL 4029 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_sframe->output_section != NULL) 4030 1.1.1.11 christos { 4031 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma plt_start = htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma; 4032 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma sframe_start = htab->plt_sframe->output_section->vma 4033 1.1.1.11 christos + htab->plt_sframe->output_offset 4034 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_SFRAME_FDE_START_OFFSET; 4035 1.1.1.12 christos bfd_put_signed_64 (dynobj, plt_start - sframe_start, 4036 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe->contents 4037 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_SFRAME_FDE_START_OFFSET); 4038 1.1.1.11 christos } 4039 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe->sec_info_type == SEC_INFO_TYPE_SFRAME) 4040 1.1.1.11 christos { 4041 1.1.1.11 christos if (! _bfd_elf_merge_section_sframe (output_bfd, info, 4042 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe, 4043 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe->contents)) 4044 1.1.1.11 christos return false; 4045 1.1.1.11 christos } 4046 1.1.1.11 christos } 4047 1.1.1.11 christos 4048 1.1.1.9 christos return true; 4049 1.1 skrll } 4050 1.1.1.6 christos 4051 1.1.1.6 christos /* Support for core dump NOTE sections. */ 4053 1.1.1.9 christos 4054 1.1.1.6 christos static bool 4055 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note) 4056 1.1.1.6 christos { 4057 1.1.1.6 christos int offset; 4058 1.1.1.6 christos size_t size; 4059 1.1.1.6 christos 4060 1.1.1.6 christos switch (note->descsz) 4061 1.1.1.6 christos { 4062 1.1.1.9 christos default: 4063 1.1.1.6 christos return false; 4064 1.1.1.6 christos 4065 1.1.1.6 christos case 336: /* sizeof(struct elf_prstatus) on s390x */ 4066 1.1.1.6 christos /* pr_cursig */ 4067 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12); 4068 1.1.1.6 christos 4069 1.1.1.6 christos /* pr_pid */ 4070 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 32); 4071 1.1.1.6 christos 4072 1.1.1.6 christos /* pr_reg */ 4073 1.1.1.6 christos offset = 112; 4074 1.1.1.6 christos size = 216; 4075 1.1.1.6 christos break; 4076 1.1.1.6 christos } 4077 1.1.1.6 christos 4078 1.1.1.6 christos /* Make a ".reg/999" section. */ 4079 1.1.1.6 christos return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg", 4080 1.1.1.6 christos size, note->descpos + offset); 4081 1.1.1.6 christos } 4082 1.1.1.9 christos 4083 1.1.1.6 christos static bool 4084 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note) 4085 1.1.1.6 christos { 4086 1.1.1.6 christos switch (note->descsz) 4087 1.1.1.6 christos { 4088 1.1.1.9 christos default: 4089 1.1.1.6 christos return false; 4090 1.1.1.6 christos 4091 1.1.1.6 christos case 136: /* sizeof(struct elf_prpsinfo) on s390x */ 4092 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->pid 4093 1.1.1.6 christos = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24); 4094 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program 4095 1.1.1.6 christos = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 40, 16); 4096 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command 4097 1.1.1.6 christos = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 56, 80); 4098 1.1.1.6 christos } 4099 1.1.1.6 christos 4100 1.1.1.6 christos /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked 4101 1.1.1.6 christos onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway) 4102 1.1.1.6 christos implementations, so strip it off if it exists. */ 4103 1.1.1.6 christos 4104 1.1.1.6 christos { 4105 1.1.1.6 christos char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command; 4106 1.1.1.6 christos int n = strlen (command); 4107 1.1.1.6 christos 4108 1.1.1.6 christos if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ') 4109 1.1.1.6 christos command[n - 1] = '\0'; 4110 1.1.1.6 christos } 4111 1.1.1.9 christos 4112 1.1.1.6 christos return true; 4113 1.1.1.6 christos } 4114 1.1.1.6 christos 4115 1.1.1.6 christos static char * 4116 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_write_core_note (bfd *abfd, char *buf, int *bufsiz, 4117 1.1.1.6 christos int note_type, ...) 4118 1.1.1.6 christos { 4119 1.1 skrll va_list ap; 4120 1.1.1.6 christos 4121 1.1.1.6 christos switch (note_type) 4122 1.1.1.6 christos { 4123 1.1.1.6 christos default: 4124 1.1.1.6 christos return NULL; 4125 1.1.1.6 christos 4126 1.1.1.6 christos case NT_PRPSINFO: 4127 1.1.1.7 christos { 4128 1.1.1.6 christos char data[136] ATTRIBUTE_NONSTRING = { 0 }; 4129 1.1.1.6 christos const char *fname, *psargs; 4130 1.1.1.6 christos 4131 1.1.1.6 christos va_start (ap, note_type); 4132 1.1.1.6 christos fname = va_arg (ap, const char *); 4133 1.1.1.6 christos psargs = va_arg (ap, const char *); 4134 1.1.1.6 christos va_end (ap); 4135 1.1.1.6 christos 4136 1.1.1.8 christos strncpy (data + 40, fname, 16); 4137 1.1.1.7 christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8000 || GCC_VERSION == 8001 4138 1.1.1.8 christos DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH; 4139 1.1.1.7 christos /* GCC 8.0 and 8.1 warn about 80 equals destination size with 4140 1.1.1.7 christos -Wstringop-truncation: 4141 1.1.1.7 christos https://gcc.gnu.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=85643 4142 1.1.1.7 christos */ 4143 1.1.1.7 christos DIAGNOSTIC_IGNORE_STRINGOP_TRUNCATION; 4144 1.1.1.6 christos #endif 4145 1.1.1.8 christos strncpy (data + 56, psargs, 80); 4146 1.1.1.7 christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8000 || GCC_VERSION == 8001 4147 1.1.1.7 christos DIAGNOSTIC_POP; 4148 1.1.1.6 christos #endif 4149 1.1.1.6 christos return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type, 4150 1.1.1.6 christos &data, sizeof (data)); 4151 1.1.1.6 christos } 4152 1.1.1.6 christos 4153 1.1.1.6 christos case NT_PRSTATUS: 4154 1.1.1.6 christos { 4155 1.1.1.6 christos char data[336] = { 0 }; 4156 1.1.1.6 christos long pid; 4157 1.1.1.6 christos int cursig; 4158 1.1.1.6 christos const void *gregs; 4159 1.1.1.6 christos 4160 1.1.1.6 christos va_start (ap, note_type); 4161 1.1.1.6 christos pid = va_arg (ap, long); 4162 1.1.1.6 christos cursig = va_arg (ap, int); 4163 1.1.1.6 christos gregs = va_arg (ap, const void *); 4164 1.1.1.6 christos va_end (ap); 4165 1.1.1.6 christos 4166 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_put_16 (abfd, cursig, data + 12); 4167 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_put_32 (abfd, pid, data + 32); 4168 1.1.1.6 christos memcpy (data + 112, gregs, 216); 4169 1.1.1.6 christos return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type, 4170 1.1.1.6 christos &data, sizeof (data)); 4171 1.1.1.6 christos } 4172 1.1.1.6 christos } 4173 1.1.1.6 christos /* NOTREACHED */ 4174 1.1.1.6 christos } 4175 1.1 skrll 4176 1.1 skrll /* Return address for Ith PLT stub in section PLT, for relocation REL 4178 1.1 skrll or (bfd_vma) -1 if it should not be included. */ 4179 1.1 skrll 4180 1.1 skrll static bfd_vma 4181 1.1 skrll elf_s390_plt_sym_val (bfd_vma i, const asection *plt, 4182 1.1 skrll const arelent *rel ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4183 1.1 skrll { 4184 1.1 skrll return plt->vma + PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE + i * PLT_ENTRY_SIZE; 4185 1.1.1.4 christos } 4186 1.1.1.4 christos 4187 1.1.1.4 christos /* Merge backend specific data from an object file to the output 4188 1.1.1.9 christos object file when linking. */ 4189 1.1.1.6 christos 4190 1.1.1.6 christos static bool 4191 1.1.1.12 christos elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data (bfd *ibfd, struct bfd_link_info *info) 4192 1.1.1.9 christos { 4193 1.1.1.6 christos if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd)) 4194 1.1.1.6 christos return true; 4195 1.1.1.6 christos 4196 1.1.1.6 christos return elf_s390_merge_obj_attributes (ibfd, info); 4197 1.1.1.6 christos } 4198 1.1.1.6 christos 4199 1.1.1.6 christos /* We may add a PT_S390_PGSTE program header. */ 4200 1.1.1.6 christos 4201 1.1.1.6 christos static int 4202 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_additional_program_headers (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 4203 1.1.1.6 christos struct bfd_link_info *info) 4204 1.1.1.6 christos { 4205 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 4206 1.1.1.6 christos 4207 1.1.1.6 christos if (info) 4208 1.1.1.6 christos { 4209 1.1.1.6 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 4210 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab) 4211 1.1.1.6 christos return htab->params->pgste; 4212 1.1.1.6 christos } 4213 1.1.1.6 christos return 0; 4214 1.1.1.6 christos } 4215 1.1.1.6 christos 4216 1.1.1.6 christos 4217 1.1.1.9 christos /* Add the PT_S390_PGSTE program header. */ 4218 1.1.1.6 christos 4219 1.1.1.4 christos static bool 4220 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_modify_segment_map (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info) 4221 1.1.1.6 christos { 4222 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 4223 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_segment_map *m, *pm = NULL; 4224 1.1.1.9 christos 4225 1.1.1.6 christos if (!abfd || !info) 4226 1.1.1.6 christos return true; 4227 1.1.1.6 christos 4228 1.1.1.9 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 4229 1.1.1.6 christos if (!htab || !htab->params->pgste) 4230 1.1.1.6 christos return true; 4231 1.1.1.6 christos 4232 1.1.1.6 christos /* If there is already a PT_S390_PGSTE header, avoid adding 4233 1.1.1.6 christos another. */ 4234 1.1.1.6 christos m = elf_seg_map (abfd); 4235 1.1.1.6 christos while (m && m->p_type != PT_S390_PGSTE) 4236 1.1.1.6 christos { 4237 1.1.1.6 christos pm = m; 4238 1.1.1.6 christos m = m->next; 4239 1.1.1.6 christos } 4240 1.1.1.9 christos 4241 1.1.1.4 christos if (m) 4242 1.1.1.6 christos return true; 4243 1.1.1.6 christos 4244 1.1.1.6 christos m = (struct elf_segment_map *) 4245 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_zalloc (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_segment_map)); 4246 1.1.1.6 christos if (m == NULL) 4247 1.1.1.6 christos return false; 4248 1.1.1.6 christos m->p_type = PT_S390_PGSTE; 4249 1.1.1.6 christos m->count = 0; 4250 1.1.1.6 christos m->next = NULL; 4251 1.1.1.4 christos if (pm) 4252 1.1.1.9 christos pm->next = m; 4253 1.1.1.4 christos 4254 1.1.1.4 christos return true; 4255 1.1.1.9 christos } 4256 1.1.1.6 christos 4257 1.1.1.6 christos bool 4258 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_elf_s390_set_options (struct bfd_link_info *info, 4259 1.1.1.6 christos struct s390_elf_params *params) 4260 1.1.1.6 christos { 4261 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 4262 1.1.1.6 christos 4263 1.1.1.6 christos if (info) 4264 1.1.1.6 christos { 4265 1.1.1.6 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 4266 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab) 4267 1.1.1.6 christos htab->params = params; 4268 1.1.1.9 christos } 4269 1.1.1.6 christos 4270 1.1.1.6 christos return true; 4271 1.1.1.11 christos } 4272 1.1.1.11 christos 4273 1.1.1.11 christos /* Create .plt, .rela.plt, .got, .got.plt, .rela.got, .dynbss, and 4274 1.1.1.11 christos .rela.bss sections in DYNOBJ, and set up shortcuts to them in our 4275 1.1.1.11 christos hash table. */ 4276 1.1.1.11 christos 4277 1.1.1.11 christos static bool 4278 1.1.1.11 christos elf_s390_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *dynobj, 4279 1.1.1.11 christos struct bfd_link_info *info) 4280 1.1.1.11 christos { 4281 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab; 4282 1.1.1.11 christos 4283 1.1.1.11 christos if (!_bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (dynobj, info)) 4284 1.1.1.11 christos return false; 4285 1.1.1.11 christos 4286 1.1.1.11 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info); 4287 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab == NULL) 4288 1.1.1.11 christos return false; 4289 1.1.1.11 christos 4290 1.1.1.11 christos htab->sframe_plt = &elf_s390x_sframe_plt; 4291 1.1.1.11 christos 4292 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->elf.splt != NULL) 4293 1.1.1.11 christos { 4294 1.1.1.11 christos /* Create .eh_frame section for .plt section. */ 4295 1.1.1.11 christos if (!info->no_ld_generated_unwind_info) 4296 1.1.1.11 christos { 4297 1.1.1.11 christos flagword flags = (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY 4298 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_IN_MEMORY 4299 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_LINKER_CREATED); 4300 1.1.1.11 christos 4301 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame == NULL) 4302 1.1.1.11 christos { 4303 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame 4304 1.1.1.11 christos = bfd_make_section_anyway_with_flags (dynobj, 4305 1.1.1.11 christos ".eh_frame", 4306 1.1.1.11 christos flags); 4307 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame == NULL 4308 1.1.1.11 christos || !bfd_set_section_alignment (htab->plt_eh_frame, 3)) 4309 1.1.1.11 christos return false; 4310 1.1.1.11 christos } 4311 1.1.1.12 christos } 4312 1.1.1.12 christos 4313 1.1.1.12 christos /* Create .sframe section for .plt section. 4314 1.1.1.12 christos Do not make SFrame sections for dynobj unconditionally. If there 4315 1.1.1.12 christos are no SFrame sections for any input files, skip creating the linker 4316 1.1.1.12 christos created SFrame sections too. Since SFrame sections are marked KEEP, 4317 1.1.1.12 christos prohibiting these linker-created SFrame sections when unnecessary, 4318 1.1.1.12 christos helps avoid creating of empty SFrame sections in the output. */ 4319 1.1.1.12 christos bool gen_plt_sframe_p = (_bfd_elf_sframe_present_input_bfds (info) 4320 1.1.1.11 christos && !info->discard_sframe); 4321 1.1.1.11 christos if (gen_plt_sframe_p) 4322 1.1.1.11 christos { 4323 1.1.1.11 christos flagword flags = (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY 4324 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_IN_MEMORY 4325 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_LINKER_CREATED); 4326 1.1.1.11 christos 4327 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe = bfd_make_section_anyway_with_flags (dynobj, 4328 1.1.1.11 christos ".sframe", 4329 1.1.1.11 christos flags); 4330 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe == NULL) 4331 1.1.1.11 christos return false; 4332 1.1.1.11 christos 4333 1.1.1.11 christos elf_section_type (htab->plt_sframe) = SHT_GNU_SFRAME; 4334 1.1.1.11 christos } 4335 1.1.1.11 christos } 4336 1.1.1.11 christos 4337 1.1.1.6 christos return true; 4338 1.1 skrll } 4339 1.1 skrll 4340 1.1 skrll /* Why was the hash table entry size definition changed from 4341 1.1 skrll ARCH_SIZE/8 to 4? This breaks the 64 bit dynamic linker and 4342 1.1.1.12 christos this is the only reason for the s390_elf64_size_info structure. */ 4343 1.1 skrll 4344 1.1 skrll static const struct elf_size_info s390_elf64_size_info = 4345 1.1 skrll { 4346 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Ehdr), 4347 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Phdr), 4348 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Shdr), 4349 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Rel), 4350 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela), 4351 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Sym), 4352 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Dyn), 4353 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf_External_Note), 4354 1.1 skrll 8, /* hash-table entry size. */ 4355 1.1 skrll 1, /* internal relocations per external relocations. */ 4356 1.1 skrll 64, /* arch_size. */ 4357 1.1 skrll 3, /* log_file_align. */ 4358 1.1 skrll ELFCLASS64, EV_CURRENT, 4359 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_write_out_phdrs, 4360 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_write_shdrs_and_ehdr, 4361 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_checksum_contents, 4362 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_write_relocs, 4363 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_in, 4364 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_out, 4365 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_slurp_reloc_table, 4366 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_slurp_symbol_table, 4367 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in, 4368 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out, 4369 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_in, 4370 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out, 4371 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_in, 4372 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out 4373 1.1.1.4 christos }; 4374 1.1 skrll 4375 1.1 skrll #define TARGET_BIG_SYM s390_elf64_vec 4376 1.1.1.2 christos #define TARGET_BIG_NAME "elf64-s390" 4377 1.1 skrll #define ELF_ARCH bfd_arch_s390 4378 1.1 skrll #define ELF_TARGET_ID S390_ELF_DATA 4379 1.1 skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE EM_S390 4380 1.1 skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_ALT1 EM_S390_OLD 4381 1.1 skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE 0x1000 4382 1.1 skrll 4383 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_size_info s390_elf64_size_info 4384 1.1 skrll 4385 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections 1 4386 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount 1 4387 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt 1 4388 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly 1 4389 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym 0 4390 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size 24 4391 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_want_dynrelro 1 4392 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal 1 4393 1.1 skrll 4394 1.1 skrll #define elf_info_to_howto elf_s390_info_to_howto 4395 1.1 skrll 4396 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_is_local_label_name elf_s390_is_local_label_name 4397 1.1.1.6 christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_link_hash_table_create elf_s390_link_hash_table_create 4398 1.1.1.4 christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_type_lookup elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup 4399 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_name_lookup elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup 4400 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_merge_private_bfd_data elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data 4401 1.1 skrll 4402 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol 4403 1.1.1.11 christos #define elf_backend_check_relocs elf_s390_check_relocs 4404 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol 4405 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections elf_s390_create_dynamic_sections 4406 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections 4407 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol 4408 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook elf_s390_gc_mark_hook 4409 1.1.1.11 christos #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class elf_s390_reloc_type_class 4410 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section elf_s390_relocate_section 4411 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_late_size_sections elf_s390_late_size_sections 4412 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_init_index_section _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section 4413 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus elf_s390_grok_prstatus 4414 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo elf_s390_grok_psinfo 4415 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_write_core_note elf_s390_write_core_note 4416 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_plt_sym_val elf_s390_plt_sym_val 4417 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_sort_relocs_p elf_s390_elf_sort_relocs_p 4418 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_additional_program_headers elf_s390_additional_program_headers 4419 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_modify_segment_map elf_s390_modify_segment_map 4420 1.1 skrll 4421 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_mkobject elf_s390_mkobject 4422 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_object_p elf_s390_object_p 4423 4424 #include "elf64-target.h" 4425